JP6521454B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, for example, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge array in the gaming area into which gaming media such as gaming balls are driven, and the appropriate position of the gaming area There are a number of receiving ports that can receive gaming media (for example, a general winning opening, a variable winning opening, a starting opening, a prize winning opening, a big winning opening, etc.), and gaming media can be received into the receiving opening. Thus, a predetermined number of game media are paid out. Further, in the gaming area of the gaming machine, a symbol such as a predetermined character or logo or a decorative body in which a predetermined pattern or the like is three-dimensionally shaped according to the type or concept of the gaming machine is disposed. A gaming machine is characterized by the decorative body.

In this type of game machine, after the decorative body is formed of a translucent member, a light emitting means such as an LED is disposed on the rear side of the decorative body, and light is emitted between the light emitting means and the decorative body By arranging the lens member to diffuse the light from the means and making the light emitting means emit light according to the game state, it is possible to make the decorative body emit light in a predetermined color without unevenness and attract the player's interest strongly At the same time, it has been proposed to be able to differentiate greatly from other gaming machines (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-153903, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, although the decorative member disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel can be lighted and decorated by the light from the light emitting means, the user sees the lighted decoration of the decorative member and interest in the gaming machine There was a risk of falling.

Therefore, in view of the above situation, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of attracting the player's interest strongly.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention is
A game area where game media are shot by the operation of the player,
A game panel on which the game area is formed;
A decorative body disposed on the rear side of the game panel and including a light emitting unit;
Effect display means disposed behind the game panel and capable of visually recognizing a predetermined effect image displayed in a display area through the opening of the game panel;
Moving means for moving the decorative body according to the game situation;
A gaming machine comprising
The moving means may have a standby position overlapping with the game panel, and an operation position different from the standby position where specific effects by the decorative body can be performed while covering the display area with the decorative body rather than the standby position. Make the decoration movable
The decorative body is visible at the standby position overlapping the game panel,
The light emitting unit provided in the decorative body includes a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit,
The light emitting unit includes a light emitting unit that causes the first light emitting unit to emit light when the decoration body is in the standby position overlapping the game panel.
At the time of the specific effect execution which is made executable when the decorative body moves to the operation position different from the standby position, the light is not emitted at the standby position in addition to the first light emitting unit emitted at the standby position. When the specific effect is performed, the second light emitting unit emits light, which can be performed when the light emitting unit of the decorative body at the standby position moves to the operating position different from the light emitting unit and the standby position. It is comprised so that light emission control is possible so that the number of light emission of the said light emission part of a decoration may differ,
The decorative body is provided with a decorative portion which is not visible at the standby position and is visible at the time of the specific effect execution.
The light emission control of the light emitting unit provided in the decorative body and the control of the moving means for moving the decorative body are controlled by a common control means in common,
further,
The common control means is a display effect that can be executed by the effect display means in response to entering the winning opening provided in the game area, and a light emitting unit provided to the non-movable decorative object that is not moved by the moving means. It is characterized in that light emission can be controlled separately.

Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of attracting the player's attention strongly.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 10, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 12 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), EE sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left unit of the side speaker illumination decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 26 from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right unit of the side speaker illumination decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 28 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the ball | bowl feed unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of the joint unit in a door frame base unit, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows a joint unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a top lamp lighting unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp lighting unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp lighting unit from diagonally front lower. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing (A) later. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp electric decoration unit, and shows it with a top lamp base from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 35 later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp | ramp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the center rotation lamp | ramp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a saucer unit. It is a rear perspective view of a saucer unit. It is a top view of a saucer unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view shown in the state which removed the back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view shown behind, in the state where the back plate of a plate unit and the ball unit for balls were removed. It is a disassembled perspective view shown disassembled for every main component of a pan unit and showing it from the front. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles and shows the pan unit main body in a pan unit from the front. FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball extraction mechanism in a pan unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball extraction mechanism in a pan unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a saucer unit. It is a bottom view in the state where the operation button unit substrate of the operation button unit in a saucer unit was removed. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in a saucer unit from the bottom. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles and shows the main button of the operation button unit in a saucer unit. It is a sectional view of a handle device attached to a door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle device and the striking-ball launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a striking-ballistic launch apparatus. (A) is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the dish unit, (B) is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a second ball outlet and a flow of gaming balls in the dish unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the laterally long ball | bowl inflow port in a pan unit, and a storage pan. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembles and shows a glass unit from the front. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main part before attaching a part. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a main part frame main part before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the body frame which attached parts. It is a cross-sectional top view of a pachinko machine cut by the horizon line of the middle (main control board box part) of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a main part frame which shows the structure by the side of a main part frame to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing the front component in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder, cut in the longitudinal direction in an assembled state. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front component, game panel, and panel holder etc. which mainly comprise a game board, and was seen from diagonally. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 83 from diagonally back. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing the main control board box fixed to the board substrate holder for the panel from diagonally behind. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the panel substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control substrate box of FIG. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. FIG. 7 is a schematic view of a function display sticker. FIG. 10 is a partial view of a function display sticker on the game board through the game window. They are the perspective view (A) of the whole batting launching device, and the perspective view in the state where a firing motor part was removed (B). It is an exploded perspective view of a hit ball launcher. They are a front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a firing motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the ball striking launch device and the firing rail in the state which is not operating the operation handle part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher and the firing rail in the state which is operating the operation handle part. It is the top view (A) of the slide member provided in a bat firing device, a front view (B), the perspective view (C) seen from the front, and an AA sectional view (D) of the front view (B). They are a perspective view (A), a top view (B), and a side view (C) of a prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B), and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship of a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball | bowl passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball | bowl passage unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows a relationship with a ball | bowl passage unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball | bowl passage unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the award ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between a delivery motor and the sprocket as a delivery member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the passage of a prize ball unit, and a drive relation. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul opening. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul opening. It is a rear perspective view which shows the relationship between a lock device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine cut in a horizontal direction at a position slightly below the longitudinal center of the pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view showing a detailed relation between a lock device and a side wall of a main part frame. It is a side view (A) of a lock device, and a perspective view (B) seen from the front side. A perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the lock device (A), a perspective view (B) of a sliding door for a glass door slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device (B), (C). It is an exploded perspective view of a lock device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding lever for glass doors, and the sliding lever for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the board | substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes a main part of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the frame substrate holder. It is a rear view of a board | substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit of the state which removed the delivery control board box and the terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of rear view of a pachinko machine which shows wiring etc. of a delivery control board and a substrate unit. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board for describing the cross-sectional location of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 137. It is the perspective view seen from the back where the cover body in a pachinko machine was opened. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the pivotal support side of the cover body in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the delivery control board box which carries out polymerization contact with the lower part of a cover body. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the back. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view in which the game board is horizontally cut at a substantially center in the vertical direction. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonal back. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at an attacker unit from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is a perspective view showing each opening-and-closing drive mechanism in an attacker unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from diagonally in the state which removed the backplate of the center role thing. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from diagonally in the state which removed the backplate of the center role thing. It is the perspective view which looked at the back front unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back front unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back front unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back front unit into every main member, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a back unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the back unit diagonally from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit to each main member, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit to each main member, and was seen from diagonal back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper movable decoration of the back unit in the back unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper movable decoration body unit of the back rear unit in the back unit diagonally from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper movable decoration unit into main members and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper movable decoration unit into every main member, and was seen diagonally from the back. It is a top view shown in the state which omitted the unit base and slider cover of the upper movable decoration body unit. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the main body unit in a top movable decoration unit, and a star unit. It is a front view showing arrangement of LED in a top movable ornament unit. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a top movable decoration unit. It is a front view which shows a side movable decoration unit. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a side movable decoration unit. It is a rear view shown in the state which removed the unit base cover and back raising / lowering base of a lower movable decoration unit. FIG. 181 is a perspective view of FIG. 181 seen obliquely from the rear; It is an explanatory view showing movement of a lower movable ornament unit. It is an explanatory view showing arrangement of LED in a lower movable ornament unit. FIG. 5 is a plan cross-sectional view of the back box body along with the peripheral substrate box. It is a front view which shows the position of the main decoration board in a game board. It is a front view which shows a motion of the upper movable decoration body unit in a game board. FIG. 187 is a front view showing the movement of the upper movable decorative unit continued to FIG. 187; FIG. 188 is a front view showing the movement of the upper movable decorative body unit continued to FIG. 188. It is a front view which shows the movement of the side movable decoration in a game board. It is a front view which shows the movement of the lower movable decoration in a game board. FIG. 191 is a front view showing the movement of the lower movable decorative body continued from FIG. 191. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. It is a perspective view of the raising / lowering drive mechanism of a lower movable decoration unit. It is a perspective view which shows the back raising / lowering base of a lower movable decoration unit from an inner side. It is a side view of the back raising and lowering base of a lower movable decoration unit. It is a perspective view showing the back right wing decoration board of a lower movable decoration unit from the back. It is a perspective view showing the back left wing decoration substrate of a lower movable decoration unit from the back.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame constituting the pachinko machine, a main frame, a game board, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

  In FIG. 1 to FIG. 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of the game hall and an open / close pivotal support on the outer frame 2 and mounting the game board 4 The game window 101 in which the player can visually recognize the main body frame 3 which can be made, and the game area 605 which is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is struck And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray which is disposed and stores balls to be paid out as a result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing bracket 14 for reinforcing the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the lower front of the outer frame 2. In addition to the game board 4 being detachably attachable to the main body frame 3 as described above, it is provided on the bottom of the back surface with a ball striking device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 A substrate unit 1100 is attached to which various control substrates for controlling electrical parts, a power supply substrate 1136 and the like are provided together, and a cover 1250 covering a rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3 is provided. It is provided detachably. Furthermore, in addition to the plate unit 300 described above, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the game window 101. And, the feature of this embodiment is that there is one plate unit 300 provided in the door frame 5, and furthermore, the handle device 400 conventionally provided in the main body frame 3 is provided in the door frame 5, and the door Since the frame 5 and the body frame 3 have substantially the same rectangular size when viewed from the front, the body frame 3 can not be viewed from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 12. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 10 (A), a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 12 (A) (B), a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D (C) , E-E cross-sectional view (D). FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support bracket of the main body frame and the upper support bracket of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 is a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support bracket of the outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows an attachment state, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. Further, FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  In FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. Are assembled in a square shape by connecting them with connecting members 19 for connecting the respective end portions. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape having a level difference between the center and the left and right, and an engagement notch in which a protruding center portion is formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 The side frame plates 12 and 13 are fitted on the side surface of the left and right portions of which the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the flat surface of the left and right portions. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  Then, in this state, the insertion hole 21 and the connecting member 19 which are formed in the both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and the both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame 11 respectively are one step lower (Two in the case of illustration) connection holes 22 (the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 of FIG. (In the illustrated case) and is fastened with a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connection screws 23 from the upper or lower side, and further, a plurality (two or more) In the illustrated case, two (two in the figure) mounting holes 24 and a plurality (three in the case of the figure) of connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 are made coincident with each other. In the illustrated case, the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame are fixed by fastening them with the three connection screws 26 and 27). 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, among the three connection screws 26 and 27, one connection screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 to the connection member 19, but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. It directly connects with the member 19 from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wooden as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 Is made of an extruded sheet of lightweight metal such as aluminum alloy. The reason why upper frame plate 10 and lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wooden as in the prior art is that when pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island in a row in a game arcade, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical surface of the island. Although it is necessary to carry out a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by striking a nail on the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that the nail is easy to strike. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness can be formed thinner while maintaining the strength compared to the conventional wood, so the inner side of the side frame plates 12 and 13 When viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to each other, the lateral width can be widened. Therefore, the game board 4 having a large dimension in the left-right direction can be attached to the main frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of aluminum alloy flat plates, sufficient rigidity can not be secured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plates 12 (the side frame plates 13 have the same structure as well. A space 28 (the space 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) opened rearward by a rib on the inner side of the rear part of T.) is drawn out and formed to increase the thickness h1 of the rear part There is. Of course, this thickness h1 has a size equal to or slightly smaller than that of the conventional wood.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 12B and 12D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 which is one step lower than the groove portion 29 (the side The groove 29 of the frame plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG. From the groove portion 29 to the front end portion of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 12B to 12D, the inner side surface thereof is a flat plate in which the other portion of the left and right portions one step lower However, the flat portion has a shallow recess for material reduction. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12B, a recess 30 (a side frame in which the hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted into the opposite surface (outside surface) where the groove 29 is formed. The recess 30 of the plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG.

  Further, in the side frame plate 12 on the pivotal support side formed as described above, the drooping piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is provided on the upper side of the side frame plate 12 in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 19. The mounting holes 31 for fixing with the fixing screws 32 are formed at the same time and are made to coincide with the mounting holes 69 formed in the vertical contact pieces 72 of the lower support fitting 66 at the lower part thereof. An attachment hole 33 for fastening is formed. A mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing fitting 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the front portion of the side frame plate 12 below the mounting hole 33.

  On the other hand, in the side frame portion 13 on the open side, in addition to the configuration for attaching the connection member 19, an attachment hole 37 for attaching the closing projection 38 with the attachment screw 39 is drilled in the upper portion. The mounting hole 40 for mounting the projection 41 with the mounting screw 42 is drilled, and the mounting hole 43 for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing bracket 14 at the lowermost position with the fixing screw 44 is further provided. It is formed.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the closing projections 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 121) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3. And lock the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and pivot it to one side, as will be described in detail later. The engagement can be released to open the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2.

  In addition, the cover reinforcement fitting 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the lower side frame plates 12 and 13 is such that the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface at the time of closing. The surface and sides of the cover are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the open upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15 of the outer frame 2.

  By the way, it is attached along one side upper surface of upper support fitting 45 and cover reinforcement fitting 14 which also has a function of connecting upper frame plate 10 and side frame plate 12 as a structure for pivotally supporting body frame 3 so as to open and close freely. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support hook 47 which is formed by being bent toward the center of the tip from the side of the support projection 46 in the support projection 46 projecting forward. An axial support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of an upper axial support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed in a shape projecting forward, but a support projection 68 is projected upward from this projecting portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 The support hole formed in FIG. 72) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after engaging the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main frame 3 with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support bracket 66, By pivotally supporting the support pin 504 of the upper shaft support 503 in the support hole 47, the shaft can be supported in a freely open / close manner.

  The upper support fitting 45 is mounted on the mounting step 49 formed concavely on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the support side. The mounting screw 51 is inserted from the top by aligning the mounting holes 48 (two in the case of illustration) and the mounting holes 50 (two in the case of illustration) formed in the mounting step 49 with one another. The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by fixing to the holding plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  Further, on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, there is a hanging piece portion 53 that abuts the outside of the side frame plate 12, and in the hanging piece portion 53, a mounting hole is bored. The upper support fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 are fixed and the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 are connected via the upper support fitting 45 by fixing them with the fixing screw 32. .

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state in which the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 are aligned as described above. The mounting screw 71 is inserted into the mounting hole 70 drilled in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66 so that it is fixed to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is a side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 which are the constituent members with the connecting member 19. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 19 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength is high and the square shape is robust It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement between the connecting member 19 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 described above, the left and right of the connecting member 19 are lowered in the groove 29 when the connecting member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Because one part of the part is fitted in, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 becomes strong, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Also, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, the upper support fitting 45 is mounted at a predetermined position as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of each frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 on a pachinko island stand (not shown), adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lender. Also, when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 14, a lock member 80 is rotatably pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 45 for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 in an openable / closable manner. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the support projection 46 of the upper support fitting 45 is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at its tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support projection 46. The hanging wall 46a is formed to be bent into two. The hanging wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45, and can improve the appearance by making the lock member 80 described below invisible when viewed from the front, and further improving the appearance. Then, it is used as a portion to which the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 described below abuts, or as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outward from the support projection piece 46. . Further, the support wedging hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed by being bent so as to be further inclined toward the center of the tip slightly from the opposite side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed toward the inner side It is done. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support wedge hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 504.

  Further, the hanging wall 46a described above is formed by being bent at a right angle along the outer edges of the support protruding piece 46 and the upper support fitting 45 from the front inlet end of the support hole 47 and the support hole 47. Is bent inward at the front end of the inlet end portion to form a stop drooping portion 47a. Further, a mounting hole 46b is formed substantially at the center of the support protruding piece 46, and the lock member 80 is rotatably supported by the rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46b. The lock member 80 is molded of synthetic resin, the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and the arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is set up. Further, an attachment hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b. Thus, in the state where the lock member 80 is attached to the attachment hole 46b by the rivet 81 and rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support projection 46, as shown in FIG. 14B, the tip contact of the elastic piece 80c The part is in contact with the inner side surface of the hanging wall 46a, and the stopper part 80a closes the inclined hole part of the support hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80 a does not close the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedge hole 47. That is, in the normal state, a space into which the pivot support pin 504 of the upper pivot support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 47.

  By the way, the state in which the support pin 504 is inserted into the end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 and the end side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop drooping portion 47a of the inlet end (in this state In the usual axially supported state where there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop drooping portion 47a), the support weir 47 formed by bending The respective centers of the pivotal support pin 504 located in the end space portion of the inclined hole portion and the end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a are in a state of being shifted in the diagonal direction and facing each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 504 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 47. Since the load on the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is formed in an arc shape so that the lock member 80 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 80b is operated and rotated. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arc tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80).

  For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support eyelet 47 and abuts on the arc-shaped tip surface 80e, the acting force F is A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the arc-shaped end surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arc-shaped end surface 80e, and an inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support hook 47 Since the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 81 (the center of rotation of the lock member 80) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the stopper of the lock member 80 Since the moment for rotating the tip of the portion 80a in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) freed from the support protrusion 46 does not work, the pivot pin 504 has an inclined shape of the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 and the support hook 47 State of being held between one side inner surface of the hole To hold. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and the elastic integrally formed of synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c, and to prevent the support pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 for a long period of time. Even if the distal end of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 46 by applying an excessive force, one side of the distal end of the stopper 80a Does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 47 a and thus does not rotate further, the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support protrusion 46.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the center of the arc of the arc-shaped end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80). Although there has been described the case where no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 80 even when the acting force F in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 47 is applied, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip end face 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced, and the pivoting position of the locking member 80 by the rivet 81 is on the inside of the support projecting piece 46, the pivoting pin 504 inclines the support hook 47 When an acting force F is applied in a direction to come out along the inclination of the hole portion and abuts on the arc-shaped end face 80f, the acting force F is brought into contact with the pivot pin 504 and the arc-shaped end face 80f The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) acting on the part, and the component acting on the contact portion between the pivot pin 504 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole of the support rod hole 47 In the case of dividing into F2, the rotational moment works by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise direction), but even if the lock member 80 rotates, one end of the stopper portion 80a Since only the sides abut the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support protrusion 46 and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

  That is, the point which can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 504 is pulled out along the slope of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. A rotational moment for rotating the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 of the action force F and the end faces 80e and 80f when F is applied and abuts on the end faces 80e and 80f. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where no rotation occurs or a rotational moment causing the tip of the lock member 80 to rotate to the outside of the support protrusion 46 Also, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 80a stops and the hanging portion 47 Since only abuts against the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46. In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface of the stopper portion 80a is not arc-shaped, the tip of the lock member 80 is directed to the outside of the support projecting piece 46 at a position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotational moment to be rotated is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. The applicant confirms that the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46 because only one end of the stopper portion 80a abuts on the stop hanging portion 47a even when 80 rotates. doing.

  The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise of pivotally supporting the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, the support projections 68 of the lower support fitting 66 in the support holes (not shown) formed in the frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) Needs to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 80 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 80c, the pivot pin 504 can be inserted into the support hook hole 47. Then, when the pivotal support pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivotal support pin 504 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 80a do not abut Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 47 at the same time. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 80 a faces the pivot pin 504 so that the pivot pin 504 does not fall out of the support hook hole 47. Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 504 from the support hook hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 46 so that the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80a is retracted from the support hook hole 47, so that the support pin 504 is supported. It can be removed from the hole 47. After that, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 and the support projections 68 of the lower support fitting 66. .

  As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, the upper support fitting 45 can be mounted very easily on the back surface, and since it has an extremely simple structure, it is possible to reduce the number of failures and reduce the manufacturing cost. In addition, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support wedge hole 47 and abuts on the tip faces 80e and 80f, the pivotal support pin 504 of the operative force F. The tip of the lock member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support projection 46 at a position where the rotational moment for rotating the lock member 80 is not generated by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the tip and the tip faces 80e and 80f. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment occurs, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and it is integrally made of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the formed elastic piece 80c and to prevent the support pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 for a long period of time. Since the locking member 80 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 80a also rotates and abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46.

[1-2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner periphery is in a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp illumination unit 200 attached to the top of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and a dish unit 300 attached to the bottom of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100; A glass unit 450 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 to close the game window 101, and a security cover 470 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 to cover the rear lower portion of the glass unit 450 And have. Although the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described in detail later, the left and right sides of the game window 101 are provided with side speaker electronic decoration units 120. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the plate unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 on the left side (open side) of the plate unit 300 in a front view, for performing a game ball hitting operation.

1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 23 to FIG. FIG. 23 (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit. FIG. 31 (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a part of the joint unit in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31 (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 is a door frame base main body having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a vertically long and polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker electronic decoration unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame 140 made of metal fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. And a ball feeding unit 170 for feeding the game balls fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the tray unit 300 to the ball striking device 650 one by one, fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and The operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting table 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to the lower left decoration substrate 190 fixed to the lower left side of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and the ball removing path 393 of the pan unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball removal path cover 191 for closing the ball removal path opening 112 formed in the position, a door decoration drive substrate 192 fixed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 below the game window 101, and a door decoration drive A door decoration drive substrate cover 193 covering the substrate 192 from the rear, a handle relay terminal board 194 fixed immediately above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body on the lower side of the game window 101 The wiring housing groove 110b formed on the rear side of the housing 110 and capable of containing the wiring from the lower left decorative substrate 190 and the handle relay terminal plate 194 is closed from the rear side. The wiring cover 195, and a stop lever 196 which is pivotally supported on the rear side of the respective arranged door frame base body 110 in the upper left and right of the game window 101.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 composed of metal sheet metal by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support top lamp electric decoration unit 200, dish unit 300 grade, etc. while being carried out.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs 190a are mounted on the front surface of the lower left decorative substrate 190 in the door frame base unit 100 so that the left end portion of the plate unit 300 described later can be lighted and decorated. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the electric decoration parts and electric parts (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board etc., the speakers 121 and 391, the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400) provided in the door frame 5. A door relay board in which wiring from the switch, ball unit 301, operation button unit 370, etc. is collected and connected, and wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is mounted on the back surface of the main frame 3 It is connected to a winning ball payout control board 1186 via a 1102 etc. and a main control board 4100 (see FIG. 193) of a main control board box 624 attached to the game board 4.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 etc. The game window 101 of a shape is formed in the form which offsets upwards generally. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and a width of the left and right side sides, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 142, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area wider than conventional pachinko machines can be easily formed. It has become.

  In addition, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, the prize ball passing hole 111 through which the prize ball communication ball 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates on the upper part of the pivoting side (left side in front view) A ball extraction path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball extraction path 393 in the pan unit 300 below the passage opening 111 and a ball feed unit 170 for mounting the ball feed unit 170 on the open side (right side in front view) The feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later is inserted near the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are respectively formed so as to penetrate the door frame base main body 110.

  Furthermore, although the details will be described later on the left and right sides of the lower end of the game window 101, the mounting opening 116 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and the left and right mounting opening 116 respectively. A speaker opening 117 for escaping the rear ends of the side speakers 121 disposed on the outer side and below the left and right lower sides of the side speaker illumination unit 120 described later is respectively formed to penetrate.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, the front side peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 is indented to the front side along the inner periphery of the game window 101 and the front outer periphery of the glass unit 450 can contact; A wire receiving groove 110b which is formed on the lower side and formed on the front side at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 and can receive a wire, and the cam insertion opening 115 opens to attach the concave joint unit 180 toward the front And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed to project backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount, and these door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are the main frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585 of the above. The amount of protrusion of the door frame protrusion 110 d to the rear is formed to be larger than the amount of protrusion of the door frame protrusion 110 e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110 h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp illumination unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, in the door frame base main body 110, a large number of mounting bosses for fixing the side speaker illumination unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the plate unit 300, etc., and a large number of mounting holes are formed. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker illumination unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker illumination unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front face of the door frame 5 (light emission decoration) and is disposed at four corners of the game window 101. The left side speaker illumination unit 120L which can emit predetermined music, sound effects, etc. to the player by the side speaker 121, and is arranged on the axis support side (left side in front view) of the gaming window 101. And the right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the game window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes, in each of the left and right units, a vertically long illumination portion 122 and an acoustic portion 130 disposed on the top and bottom of the illumination portion 122 and having a side speaker 121, and the left and right are symmetrical. It is a structure.

  Specifically, as shown in an exploded manner in FIGS. 26 to 29, the illumination portion 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a longitudinally long semi-cylindrical transparent side illumination lens 123 and a side illumination lens 123. Of the transparent side illumination reflector 124 which is disposed on the rear side of the vehicle and which forms a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123, the side illumination decoration base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124, and The side decoration lens 126 is formed so as to wrap the upper end and the lower end of the side decoration substrate 126 fixed to the rear side, the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 from the front side respectively and attached to the side illumination base 125 Side illumination flash cover 127 supporting the 123 and the side illumination reflector 124, and the side illumination flash cover The flash lens 128 has a light-transmitting property to close the flash opening 127a of the lens 27 from the rear side, and the flash substrate 129 disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front of the side illumination base 125 .

  The electric decoration part 122 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a capable of emitting various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side electric decoration board 126, and high brightness above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a The white LEDs 126b are mounted respectively. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front and rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side electric decoration substrate 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 and the side electric decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126 a and 126 b mounted on the light source 126 can be emitted forward through the opening 125 a of the side illumination base 125 and the opening 124 a of the side illumination reflector 124.

  In the electric decoration part 122, inside the transparent cylinder of the side electric decoration lens 123 and the side electric decoration reflector 124, the entire inner circumference of the side electric decoration lens 123 and a part of the inner circumference of the side electric decoration reflector 124 As described above, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that makes transmitted light or reflected light appear pearly or colorful, and when viewed from the player side, the side illumination lens 123 is formed by the side lens sheet 123a. And in the transparent cylinder (pipe) formed of the side illumination reflector 124, it can be made to take on the appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent lamp) was arrange | positioned.

  Furthermore, in the electric decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to several LED126a of the side decoration board | substrate 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 into three groups in an up-down direction The dividing wall 124b is provided to prevent the light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, by the dividing wall 124b, the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 can be clearly divided into three, that is, the upper middle, the lower and the lower one. Therefore, by causing the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decoration substrate 126 to emit light appropriately, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light entirely or partially, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower portions. It is possible to

  Further, in the side illumination reflector 124, a lens recess 124c recessed from the front side is formed at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b in the side decoration substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens from the front side is formed in the lens recess 124c. 122a (see FIG. 28 and FIG. 29) is inserted. The electric decoration part 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side electric decoration lens 123 and the side electric decoration reflector 124 by making only the LED 126 b emit light strongly before making the LED 126 a emit light by the sub lens 122 a and the LED 126 b. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light-emitting effect in which only both ends light up and then light up.

  Furthermore, in the electric decoration part 122, a flash light 129a (for example, super high brightness white LED etc.) capable of emitting strong light is attached to the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side electric decoration flash cover 127 By making the flash light 129a emit light, it is possible to emit a flash to the player side.

  The sound unit 130 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 is a substantially disc made of a speaker ornament 131 disposed at the foremost portion and having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a, and a punching metal closing the speaker opening 131a of the speaker ornament 131 from the rear side. Speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed on the rear side of the speaker cover 132, in cooperation with the speaker decoration 131 to sandwich the speaker cover and having a circular speaker front support opening 133a, and a speaker of the decoration spacer 133 Mainly provided with a side speaker 121 arranged to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting opening 134a fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side .

  As shown in the figure, in the sound unit 130, the shapes of the speaker decoration 131, the decoration spacer 133, and the back pressing member 134 are different depending on the mounting position. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the sound unit 130 at the upper left in the front view has the speaker decoration 131 formed in a cylindrical shape, and has a decoration portion 131b extending outward from the left side The decorative spacer 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134b to be combined with the decoration part 131b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic portion 130 further includes a hinge cover 135 disposed above the back pressing decorative portion 134 b of the back pressing member 134 and covering the lower side than the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support portion 146 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 There is. Moreover, in the acoustic unit 130 at the lower left in a front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having the decoration part 131 b, and the spacer decoration part 133 b in which the decoration spacer 133 is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131 The back holding member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, in the acoustic section 130 at the upper right in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131 It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the acoustic unit 130 at the lower right in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration portion 133b that contacts the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131 The back holding member 134 is formed in a ring shape. The sound unit 130 at the lower right is further provided with a decorative base 136 on the further rear side of the back pressing member 134, having a back pressing member fixing port 136a through which the back pressing member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front. .

  The four side speakers 121 in the side speaker illumination unit 120 of the present example are disposed at the four corners of the game window 101, as shown in the figure, and for the head of the player who is likely to play the game Are arranged at the top, bottom, left, and right positions, so 2.1ch surround sound signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and a lower speaker 391 described later added to each side speaker 121 are added) By sending a signal or a 4.1 ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before. In addition, the side speaker 121 of this example mainly takes charge of a mid range to a high range, and the lower speaker 391 takes charge of a low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforcing sheet metal]
Next, as shown mainly in FIGS. 24 and 25, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 is an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the upper side back surface of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 mounted along the back surface of the support side 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 143 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 A lower reinforcing metal plate 144 attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101 is mutually tightened with a screw or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 has an upper shaft supporting portion 146 having a shaft pin 145 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 And a lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, whereby the door frame 5 is mounted to the main body frame 3. It is provided to be openable and closable.

  Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edges It is a lower bent piece 149 which is bent backward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent piece 150 which is bent backward at both sides of the upper long side edge is formed. However, a portion sandwiched by the upper bending projections 150 on both sides thereof is a vertical bending projection 151 extended in the vertical direction. Although the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 149 is not very large, and the lower bent protrusion 149 is not engaged with the groove portion or the recessed portion to form the concavo-convex engagement, and is formed to enhance the strength. On the other hand, although the amount of protrusion of the upper bending protrusions 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bending protrusions 149, the intrusion of the incorrect tool from the lower part is somewhat prevented, but rather the lower reinforcement in this embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the configuration of the sheet metal 144 is the vertical bending projection 151.

  The vertically bent projecting piece 151 is formed in a concave shape so that the upper end edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5 The upper end piece of the vertically bent projecting piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451 c formed along the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 in the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-back direction) . In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 is formed which protects the outer periphery of the bottom surface of the prize ball passage hole 111 formed in the door frame base main body 110.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an open side outer bending projection 153 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 and The open side inner bent pieces 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent pieces 154 are formed to extend rearward more than the open side outer bent pieces 153. Further, on the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141, bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 which are bent backward on both sides of the long side are respectively formed. Furthermore, a bearing side L-shaped bent projecting piece 157 is formed on the bearing side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to extend rearward at the outer end of the long side thereof. In addition, a hook cover 158 that is in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is attached to the rear lower portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting stand, ball feed unit]
Next, the mounting base 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, the mounting table 160 is attached to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100 as shown in FIGS. 18, 24 and 25, and is transparent synthetic resin like the crime prevention cover 470. It is formed in the shape of a long rectangular parallelepiped whose front is open. In order to smoothly guide the balls fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting platform 160 fires by the rear surface of the mounting platform 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. A ball flight guiding surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, in the mounting table 160 according to the present embodiment, an opening 162 for the prize ball passage opening through which the rearward projecting portion of the prize ball passage hole covering portion 152 formed on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated It is formed, and a ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed at the lower side on the open side. An area in an oblique direction from the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flight guiding surface 161.

  Further, in the middle lower part of the mounting table 160, a cover notch 164 for inserting a finger when removing the ball removal path cover 191, the door decoration drive board 192 and the door decoration drive board cover 193 described later is formed. In addition, on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160, a standing wall 165 which is vertically provided is formed. As shown in FIG. 18, when the security cover 470 is attached, the standing wall 165 abuts against the front surface of the security cover 470 to restrict the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward.

  Further, the mounting table 160 is provided with a security projection 166 which is provided obliquely rearward from the lower side of the above-mentioned ball flight guiding surface 161 to the opening for the ball passing hole 162. As described above, the crime prevention projection 166 and the crime prevention space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 are provided with the inner ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and It constitutes an engaging portion.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feeding unit 170 has a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171a of the main body 171. A feed member 172, and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311 c of the pan unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in correspondence with the reciprocation differential of the hitting ball 687 of the hitting and firing device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 515 through the strike delivery port 171 b formed in the main body 171.

  In the figure, reference numeral 174 denotes an E ring, which prevents the ball feeding member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171, and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feeding member 172. It is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Subsequently, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base main body 110 and can slide in the lateral direction in the state where the slide body 182 and the slide body 182 are accommodated. It is comprised from the cover body 184 which covers the front surface of the unit mounting recessed part 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base main body 110 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose front face is open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened on the rear face. Further, a pair of attachment holes 110 f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed at one substantially diagonal corner of the joint unit attachment recess 110 c. Furthermore, on the upper and lower sides of the inner surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c, arc-shaped contact protrusions for contacting the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 to allow the slide body 182 to move smoothly. In FIG. 31 (B), only the contact convex portion 110g on the lower side is shown, and the contact convex portion 110g on the upper side is not shown.

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit attachment recess 110 c so as to be accommodated movably in the left and right direction in the space formed by the joint unit attachment recess 110 c and the cover member 184. It is formed in an open rectangular box shape, and is disposed on the rear surface wall below the two guide projections 182a which project rearward by a predetermined amount and are arranged in a substantially horizontal direction and the guide projections 182a on the right side in rear view A plate-like slide protrusion 183 protruding rearward and a wire through cylinder portion 428 of a handle device 400 described later are pierced on the left side in a rear view with respect to the slide protrusion 183 between the two guide protrusions 182a. And a rectangular cylinder member through opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183 a which is obliquely cut in the traveling direction (right direction in rear view) at the time of sliding. Further, on the front wall of the slide body 182, a cam engaging concave portion 182c in which a cam 416 fixed to the tip end portion of the rotating shaft 415 in the handle device 400 is accommodated is formed in a U shape by a rib. And, a cam contact portion 182d is formed as an arc-shaped rib so that a portion of the vertical part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c protrudes into the cam engagement recess 182c and the portion abuts against the cam 416 It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose front face is open, and a cylindrical boss-like guide projection 182a which is provided on the front face of the slide body 182 is inserted in the front face thereof. Of the two horizontal guide holes 194a for guiding the movement of the slide, the insertion horizontal hole 184b through which the slide projection 183 provided on the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear of the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle portion 410. It projects outward from the position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c which the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 attached to the end and inserted from the cam insertion opening 115 faces and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a formed mounting hole 184d. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit attachment recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the attachment hole 110f of the joint unit attachment recess 110c through the attachment hole 184d. .

  In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit attachment recess 110c, the slide body 182 is accommodated in the joint unit attachment recess 110c, and the cover body 184 is covered from the front in that state. At the time of coating, the guide projection 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. After coating, the slide body 182 is housed inside by screwing the mounting hole 110 f with a screw via the mounting hole 184 d, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2 B. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 32 (A) is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 32 (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit from diagonally front and bottom It is. FIG. 34 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 34 (B) is an exploded perspective view showing (A) later. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown together with the top lamp base, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the central rotation lamp in the top lamp illumination unit.

  The top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is provided with three rotary lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patlite (registered trademark)) aligned in the left-right direction, as also shown in FIG. The sizes of these rotary lights 244, 264, 284 are arranged in order from the left in front view. The top lamp illumination unit 200 is fixed to the front of the box-like top lamp base 210 and to the front of the top lamp base 210 and is fixed to the top front of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 in between. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left turn light unit 240 attached to the front of top lamp reflector unit 220, right turn light unit 260, center turn light unit 280, left turn light unit 240, right turn light unit 260, Mainly provided with rotary lamp covers 201, 202 and 203 attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220 respectively covering the front of the central rotary lamp unit 280, and a reflector inner 204 covering the lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit approximately at the center ( See Figure 34)

  The top lamp illumination unit 200 further includes a top lamp power supply substrate 205 fixed to the front right of the top lamp base 210, and two top lamp decoration driving substrates 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. It is further equipped. The top lamp power supply substrate 205 includes the substrates 224, 226 and 231 and the LEDs 244a, 266a and 231a in the top lamp illumination unit 200, the motors 245, 265 and 285 of the rotary light units 240, 260 and 280, and the substrates 248. , 268, 288, and 296, and an LED 453a of a glass unit 450, which will be described later, is relayed to supply power from a power supply substrate 1136 (described later). In addition, the top lamp decoration drive substrate 206 emits light from the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LEDs in the central rotary lamp unit 280, the motors 245, 265, 285 of the respective rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280, etc. Driving is performed based on a control signal from a peripheral substrate 4010 (peripheral control substrate 4140, see FIG. 193) described later.

[1-2 B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right sides substantially follow the upper side and the left and right sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface is shaped substantially along the game window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a box shape which is horizontally long and partitioned at the middle in the front-rear direction. The mounting boss 110h of the door frame base main body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery of the top lamp base 210, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i protrudes rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the front side. A plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting bosses 211 each having an insertion hole through which a predetermined screw can be inserted. The tip of the mounting boss 110 h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted from the rear into the mounting boss portion 211, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. Is fixed to the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side of the upper lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp illumination unit 200) is mounted and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  In addition, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed bosses 212 having an insertion hole through which a predetermined screw can pass while the rear end of the fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 is engaged. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixing boss 221 j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side via the fixing boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other It has become.

  Furthermore, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply substrate 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end in front view. Is viewed from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. Further, on the left and right of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, substrate mounting portions 214 are respectively provided, and to the substrate mounting portion 214, the top lamp decoration driving substrate 206 is mounted.

[1-2 B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Subsequently, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of this embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 which can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front and is open at the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder in which three rotary lamps 244, 264, 284 are mounted side by side on the front surface, and a large space is projected forward between the central rotary lamp 284 and the left and right rotary lamps 244, 264. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b which descends downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines rearward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical portion 221a, and in the inclined portion 221b, three rectangular openings aligned in the vertical direction are formed (see FIG. 33). ). Further, the reflector base 210 is provided with vertically elongated bulging portions 221e that project forward at the left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f is formed at the front surface of the bulging portion 221e to be vertically elongated. As illustrated, the reflector base 211 is shaped such that the mounting positions of the three rotary lamps 244, 264, 284 are recessed rearward by the two cylindrical parts 221a and the inclined parts 221b and the two bulging parts 221e. It has become.

  Further, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape in which the space between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (the position where the central rotation lamp 284 is disposed) is recessed rearward, and Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening 221g penetrating substantially trapezoidal in a front view is formed on the left and right across the approximate center in the left-right direction. Further, the reflector base 221 is provided with a rotary lamp mounting so that the front ends of the rotary lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 provided with the rotary lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221 h is formed. In addition, the reflector base 221 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 221i that project rearward and which engage with the mounting bosses 211 of the top lamp base 210 and a plurality of bosses that engage with the fixed bosses 212 of the top lamp base 210 and project backwards. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with a mounting boss 221k directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without the top lamp base 210.

  The top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 fixed to a substantially central position in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lenses 222. A pair of lens sheet 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted on the front, a reflector base 210 The transparent round lens 225 inserted from the rear side into the cylindrical portion 221a in the rear to close the opening 221c, and the rear side of the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. LED226a placed on the front Mounted and a pair of partition decorative substrate 226.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin, and has three curved lens portions 222a, which are substantially trapezoidal and curved and closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and three inclined portions 221b of the reflector base 221. It comprises a divided lens portion 222 b for closing the opening 221 d and a round lens support portion 222 c in contact with the rear end of the round lens 225. In addition, while the diffused lens part 222d of the shape of a saw is formed in the upper and lower sides of the curved lens part 222a, while being able to emit light in the aspect different from the curved lens part 222a, the light from the front side Can be diffusely reflected.

  In the top inner lens 222, a projection piece 222e which protrudes in a plate shape from the rear side to the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d and an upper and lower projection pieces support the lens sheet 223 on the rear side of the curved lens portion 222a. A support recess 222f is formed. As illustrated, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged in a row corresponding to the projecting pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The positions are also distributed. Thus, the curved lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222 and the diffusion lens portion 222d can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that shows transmitted light from the LED 224 a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources and the like in a pearl shape or a colorful shape. Also, the LED 226a mounted on the partition decoration substrate 226 is an ultra-high brightness LED, and can emit strong flash light.

  Furthermore, in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top side lens 227 closing the vertically long slits 221f formed in the left and right bulging portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and the top side fixing the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side A lens holder 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 which is fixed on the rear side of the reflector base 221 to hold the lens sheet 229 And a top side substrate 231 on the front surface of which is mounted a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the top side lens 227 on the front side via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 221 is formed of a transparent resin in a V shape in plan view, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at the upper and lower ends respectively, and the locking piece 227b at the lower end is a reflector base After being locked with the lower end of the slit 221 f at 221, the locking piece 227 a at the upper end is attached to the reflector base 221 by pressing it with the top side lens presser 228. Further, the lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the above-mentioned lens sheet 223, and is also formed in a curved shape as shown in FIG. By being attached to 221, it is possible to take on the appearance that a cylindrical fluorescent tube is disposed behind the top side lens 227.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and the light from the LED 231 a of the top side substrate 231 fixed to the rear side through the inside of the frame is the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be emitted to the front surface through the lens 227.

[1-2 B-3. Rotating light unit]
Next, three rotary light units 240, 260, 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left rotation lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241 a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the position where the opening 241 a protrudes to the front side from the rotation lamp attachment opening 221 h of the reflector base 221 The rotary lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and the substantially annular rotation arranged coaxially with the opening 241 a of the rotary lamp unit base 241 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 241. A rotary lamp base gear 243 coaxially disposed with the rotary unit base 242 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotary unit base 242 and its lower surface so as to hang from the rotary lamp base gear 243 And the rotary lamp attachment opening 221 of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the rotary lamp base gear 243. Left rotation light motor 245 and left rotation light motor which are arranged on the rear side of the axis and fixed to the lower surface of rotation light unit base 241 so that rotation shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of rotation light unit base 241 A transmission gear 246 fixed to the rotary shaft 245a of the H.245 and engaged with the rotary lamp base gear 243, covering the whole of the rotary lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmission gear 246 from above and rotating the rotary lamp base gear 243 , And is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 247 coaxially with the rotating part holder 247 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 243 and heading toward the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left-turning lamp substrate 248 having a high-brightness color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The left rotation light unit 240 has a rotation light unit cover 249 covering the rotation part holder 247 from above, a left rotation position detection sensor 250 for detecting the rotation position of the rotation light 244, and a left rotation position detection sensor 250. And a left rotational position detection substrate 251.

  The rotary lamp unit base 241 of the left rotary lamp unit 240 descends downward at a position on the upper side of the opening 241a and a mounting step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a. It has an attachment portion 241c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211, and a motor fixing portion 241d disposed on the rear side of the opening 241a and fixing the left rotary light motor 245, and rotates from above in the attachment step 241b. The part base 242 is fitted. In addition, the rotational portion base 242 detects the left rotational position at a predetermined position on the shaft support port 242 a having a small diameter coaxially with the opening 241 a of the rotary lamp unit base 241 and the outer surface of the rotary lamp base gear 243 outside the outer periphery. A substrate support portion 242b supporting the lower end of the substrate 251, and a wire locking portion 242c disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and locking a wire connected to the left rotary lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; Is equipped.

  The rotary lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than the shaft support port 242 a of the rotary unit base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 242 a of the rotary unit base 242. A cylindrical gear barrel (not shown) that can be inserted inside, an axial support hole 243a that is vertically smaller and smaller than the gear barrel, and rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the barrel of the rotary lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the pivot support 242a of the rotary portion base 242, and the rotary lamp base gear is inserted by being inserted into the pivot support 242a. The shaft 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support 242a. Further, in the left rotation lamp unit 240, by detecting the rotation position detection piece 243b of the rotation lamp base gear 243 by the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the rotation position of the rotation lamp 244 can be detected. There is.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 247 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the pivot support opening 242a of the rotary unit base 242 and can be inserted into the pivot support hole 243a of the rotary light base gear 243. The holder barrel of is formed. The outside diameter of the holder barrel is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotary lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder barrel into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotary lamp base gear 243, the rotary lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the left rotation lamp unit 240 of this example, the rotation lamp base is formed by the shaft support port 242a of the rotation portion base 242, the gear shaft cylinder of the rotation lamp base gear 243 and the shaft support hole 243a, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotation portion holder 247. A gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotation lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotation portion holder 247. Further, although not shown, a substrate support portion for supporting the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 is formed on the lower surface of the rotation portion holder 247 at a position corresponding to the substrate support portion 242b of the rotation portion base 242 thereof. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is held and fixed by the rotating portion base 242 and the rotating portion holder 247.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotary lamp 244 of the left rotary lamp unit 240 is arranged below the transparent disk-shaped rotary lamp lens 252 disposed below the rotary lamp base gear 243, and below the rotary lamp lens 252. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp base gear 243, and the reflector cover 254 covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotary lamp 244 is plated on the surface with metallic luster, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening 253b bored in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d which extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper end can be in contact with the rotary lamp base gear 243.

  In the rotary lamp 244, the lower surface of the rotary lamp lens 252 faces from the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotary lamp lens 252 is formed with an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 253d into the insertion hole 252a and fixing the mounting boss 253d to the rotary lamp base gear 243, the rotary lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotary lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is supposed to be held fixed. Further, the reflector cover 254 of the rotary lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and an opening on a side surface facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253 c in the reflector 253 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotation lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a protrudes to the front side from the rotation lamp attachment opening 221h on the left side of the reflector base 221 The rotary lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be at the same position, and the substantially circle disposed coaxially with the opening 261 a of the rotary lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 261 An annular rotary unit base 262, a rotary lamp base gear 263 coaxially disposed with the rotary unit base 262 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotary unit base 262, and hanging from the rotary lamp base gear 263 The rotary lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the rotary lamp mounting of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the rotary lamp base gear 263 A right rotation light motor 265 disposed on an axis line on the rear side of 221 h and fixed to the lower surface of the rotation light unit base 261 such that the rotation shaft 265 a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation light unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotation shaft 265 a of the motor 265 and engaged with the rotary light base gear 263, covering the whole rotary light base gear 263 and a part of the transmission gear 266 from above and rotating the rotary light base gear 263 The rotary unit holder 267, which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to the rotary lamp unit base 261, is fixed to the lower surface of the rotary unit holder 267 coaxially with the rotary lamp base gear 263 and is directed to the lower rotary lamp 264 And a right-turning light substrate 268 having a high-brightness color LED (not shown) capable of emitting toward the light.

  In addition, the right rotation light unit 260 includes a rotation light unit cover 269 that covers the rotation unit holder 267 from above, a right rotation position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotation position of the rotation light 264, and a right rotation position detection sensor 270. And a right rotation position detection substrate 271.

  The rotary lamp unit base 261 of the right rotary lamp unit 260 has a mounting stepped portion 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a in the upper surface thereof, and descends downward at a position rearward of the opening 261a. A mounting portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d disposed on the rear side of the opening 261a and fixing the right rotation light motor 265 are provided, and the mounting step portion 261b rotates from above The part base 262 is fitted. In addition, the rotation portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the shaft support port 262a coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotary lamp unit base 261 and having a small diameter on the outer surface of the rotary lamp base gear 263 A substrate support portion 262b supporting the lower end of the substrate 271; and a wire locking portion 262c disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and locking a wire connected to the right rotary lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; Is equipped.

  The rotary lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than the shaft support port 262a of the rotary unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 262a of the rotary unit base 262. A cylindrical gear barrel (not shown) that can be inserted inside, an axial support hole 263a that is smaller in diameter than the gear barrel and penetrates vertically, and rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And 263b. The outer diameter of the barrel of the rotary lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the axial support port 262a of the rotary portion base 262, and the rotary lamp base gear is inserted by being inserted into the axial support port 262a. H. 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the shaft support 262a. Further, in the right rotation lamp unit 260, the rotation position of the rotation lamp 264 can be detected by detecting the rotation position detection piece 263b of the rotation lamp base gear 263 by the right rotation position detection sensor 270. There is.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 267 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the pivot support port 262a of the rotary unit base 262 and can be inserted into the pivot support hole 263a of the rotary lamp base gear 263. The holder barrel of is formed. The outer diameter of the holder barrel is slightly smaller than the bearing hole 263a of the rotary lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder barrel into the bearing hole 263a of the rotary lamp base gear 263, the rotary lamp can be turned. The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the right rotation lamp unit 260 of this example, the rotation lamp base is formed by the shaft support port 262a of the rotation portion base 262, the gear shaft cylinder of the rotation lamp base gear 263 and the shaft support hole 263a, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotation portion holder 267. A gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotation lamp base 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotation portion holder 267. Further, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 267 is provided with a substrate support unit for supporting the upper end of the right rotational position detection substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 262b of the rotary unit base 262 on the lower surface thereof. The right rotation position detection substrate 271 is nipped and fixed by the rotating portion base 262 and the rotating portion holder 267.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotary lamp 264 of the right rotary lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotary lamp 244 of the left rotary lamp unit 240, and is a transparent disc-like member disposed below the rotary lamp base gear 263. The rotary lamp lens 272, the reflector 273 disposed under the rotary lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp base gear 263, and the reflector cover 274 covering the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotary lamp 264 is plated on the surface with metallic luster, and has a disk-like base 273a, an opening 273b bored in the center of the base 273a, and a base 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d which can extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper end can be in contact with the rotary lamp base gear 263.

  In the rotary lamp 264, the lower surface of the rotary lamp lens 272 faces from the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotary lamp lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 273d into the insertion hole 272a and fixing the mounting boss 273d to the rotary lamp base gear 263, the rotary lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotary lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is supposed to be held fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotary lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and an opening on a side surface facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c in the reflector 273 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is the front side from the rotary lamp attachment opening 221h at the center in the horizontal direction of the reflector base 221. The rotary lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be projected to the same position and coaxially with the opening 281 a of the rotary lamp unit base 281 is fixed to the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 281 A substantially circular annular rotary unit base 282, a rotary lamp base gear 283 coaxially disposed with the rotary unit base 282 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotary unit base 282 and suspended from the rotary lamp base gear 283 And the rotation of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the rotation lamp base gear 283. A central rotary lamp motor 285 disposed on an axis line on the rear side of the lamp attachment opening 221h and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp unit base 281 so that the rotary shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotary lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 fixed to the rotation shaft 285 a of the central rotation light motor 285 and engaged with the rotation light base gear 283, covering the entire rotation light base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 from above and The rotary unit holder 287 is supported in cooperation with the rotary unit base 282 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary unit holder 287 coaxially with the rotary unit holder 287 and the rotary lamp base gear 283 fixed to the rotary light unit base 281. And a central rotary lamp substrate 288 having a high-brightness color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light toward the lamp 284.

  In addition, the central rotary light unit 280 includes a rotary light unit cover 289 covering the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 for detecting the rotational position of the rotary light 284 and a central rotational position detection sensor 290 And a central rotational position detection substrate 291.

  The rotary lamp unit base 281 of the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a mounting stepped portion 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a in the upper surface thereof, and descends downward at a position rearward of the opening 281a. A mounting portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d disposed on the rear side of the opening 281a and fixing the central rotary light motor 285 are provided. The part base 282 is fitted. Further, the rotational portion base 282 detects a central rotational position at a predetermined position of an axial support port 282 a having a small diameter coaxially with the opening 281 a of the rotary lamp unit base 281 and an outer surface of the rotary lamp base gear 283 outside the outer periphery. A substrate support portion 282b supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; a wire locking portion 282c disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and locking a wire connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; Is equipped.

  The rotary lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear whose outer diameter is larger than the shaft support port 282 a of the rotary unit base 282, extends downward from the lower surface, and is a shaft support port 282 a of the rotary unit base 282. A cylindrical gear barrel (not shown) that can be inserted inside, an axial support hole 283a that is smaller in diameter than the gear barrel and penetrates vertically, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And 283b. The outer diameter of the barrel of the rotary lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the axial support port 282a of the rotary portion base 282, and the rotary lamp base gear is inserted by being inserted into the axial support port 282a. 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the shaft support 282a. Further, in the central rotary light unit 280, the rotational position of the rotary light 284 can be detected by detecting the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotary light base gear 283 by the central rotational position detection sensor 290. There is.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the axial support port 282 a of the rotary unit base 282 and can be inserted into the axial support hole 283 a of the rotary lamp base gear 283. The holder barrel of is formed. The outer diameter of the holder barrel is slightly smaller than the bearing hole 283a of the rotary lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder barrel into the bearing hole 283a of the rotary lamp base gear 283, the rotary lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder barrel. That is, in the central rotary lamp unit 280 of this example, the rotary lamp base is formed by the shaft support port 282 a of the rotary portion base 282, the gear shaft cylinder of the rotary light base gear 283 and the shaft support hole 283 a, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotary unit holder 287. A gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotary lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotary unit holder 287. Further, although not shown, the rotary unit holder 287 is provided with a substrate support unit for supporting the upper end of the central rotational position detection substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 282b of the rotary unit base 282 on the lower surface thereof. The central rotational position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed by the rotating portion base 282 and the rotating portion holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the size of the rotary light 294 of the central rotary unit 280 is set to an intermediate size between the rotary light 244 of the left rotary light unit 240 and the rotary light 264 of the right rotary light unit 260, A transparent disk-shaped rotary lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotary lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotary lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotary lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 covering the The reflector 293 of the rotary lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening 293b bored in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293a and whose upper end can be in contact with the rotary lamp base gear 283.

  The rotary lamp 284 is configured such that the lower surface of the rotary lamp lens 292 faces from the opening 293 b of the reflector 293, and the rotary lamp lens 292 is formed with an insertion hole 292 a through which the mounting boss 293 d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 293 d into the insertion hole 292 a and fixing the mounting boss 293 d to the rotary lamp base gear 283, the rotary lamp lens 292 is narrow between the rotary lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is supposed to be held fixed. The reflector cover 294 of the rotary lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper side, and an opening on the side surface facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c in the reflector 293 294a is formed.

  By the way, as shown in the figure, the central rotary lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of front side three side surfaces of the rotary lamp unit cover 289 between the rotary unit holder 287 and the rotary lamp unit cover 289. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted from the rear side into the notch 289a, and a cover decoration substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted on the surface It is further equipped. The lower end of the cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are respectively supported by the grooved lens support portion 287 a and the substrate support portion 287 b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287. The upper end is supported by the grooved lens support portion and the substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, by emitting the LED of the cover decoration substrate 296, the front end of the rotary light unit cover 289 of the central rotary light unit 280 can be lighted and decorated.

[1-2 C. Dish unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 40 is a front perspective view of the pan unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the pan unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the pan unit. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the disc back plate of the pan unit removed, and FIG. 45 is a rear perspective view showing the disc back plate of the pan unit and the ball holding unit removed. Further, FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the pan unit divided into main component parts from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the rear. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body in the dish unit from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the back. Furthermore, FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball removing mechanism in the pan unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball extracting mechanism in the pan unit from behind. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the pan unit, and FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the pan unit with the operation button unit substrate of the operation button unit removed. FIG. FIG. 55 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the pan unit in an exploded manner.

  56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion and the joint unit constituting the handle device, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. Furthermore, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting and launching device provided on the main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a striking-ballistic launch apparatus. Further, FIG. 62A is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls in the dish unit, and FIG. 62B is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of gaming balls in the dish unit. It is. Further, FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a laterally long ball inlet and a storage pan in the pan unit.

  The dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can be paid out from a winning ball unit 800 described later and can store gaming balls, and a hit ball launching device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 170 the stored gaming balls. Can be supplied to As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the plate unit 300 is open at the top and the back and covers the plate 310 having a storage plate 311 capable of storing a predetermined amount of gaming balls, and covers the front of the plate 310. A first ball removing mechanism capable of discharging all of the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 of the plate unit main body 320, the plate unit main body 320, and the plate back plate 340 covering the rear surface of the plate 310 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 capable of discharging a part of the game balls stored in the storage plate of the tray 310 and discharging it, and a ball lending machine (CR unit not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 And an operation button unit 370 fixed to the upper surface of the dish 310 and operable by the player according to the gaming state (playing situation), and the dish unit main body 320 below the dish 310. dish A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 disposed between the plate 340 and the lower speaker 391 larger than the side speakers 121 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right corner of the plate unit main body 320 in a front view It mainly includes a handle base 303 disposed, and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for performing a game ball driving operation. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover which covers electric wiring connected to the dish electric decoration board 336 in the dish unit main body 320 described later. Further, as shown in the drawing, on the left side in a front view of the back plate 340, a lower left decorative substrate 190 for emitting and decorating the left end of the plate unit main body 320 is disposed.

  The ball unit 301 in the plate unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the plate back plate 340 substantially at the center in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and is arranged beside the ball button 301a and the ball button 301a. A return button 301b and a loan remaining indicator (not shown) disposed between the rental ball button 301a and the return button 301b and displaying the number of remaining cash and prepaid cards on the ball lending machine are provided. In this ball lending unit 301, after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and pressing the ball lending button 301a, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be put into the bowl unit 300 Can be borrowed (dispensed) into the storage tray 311, and when the return button 301b is pressed, the remaining amount of the loaned amount is subtracted and the cash remainder or prepaid card inserted is returned There is.

  The main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the plate unit 300 are used when the player participates in the game content (game effect) performed by the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like provided on the game board 4. It is an operation.

[1-2C-1. Dish]
First, as shown in the drawing, the tray 310 in the tray unit 300 has a storage tray 311 of a predetermined depth which is approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view and is opened upward and backward, and in the storage tray 311. A second ball outlet 312 disposed at a predetermined position in the bottom and penetrating in the vertical direction, continuing from the right end of the storage tray 312 to the storage tray 311 and being disposed downstream of the third inclined surface 311 c The first ball pulling path 313 (see FIG. 44 and FIG. 47) capable of guiding the game ball to almost directly below the second ball pulling opening 312 and the upper right side of the storage plate 311 in a substantially rhombic shape The operation button unit mounting recess 314 to which the button unit 370 can be attached, and the first ball releasing button 351 of the first ball removing mechanism 350 is opened in a substantially circular shape on the rear side of the operation button unit mounting recess 314 Ball withdrawal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage dish 311 in the dish 310 is disposed on the front of the ball inlet 341 of the back plate 340, and has a first inclined surface 311a which is lowered toward the right and front in plan view, and the right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b which is continuous with the rear of the head and lowers toward the right and the rear, and a right end of the second inclined surface 311b is continuous toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340 An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d which is continuous with a front portion of the right end of the first inclined surface 311a and a front end of the second inclined surface 311b and which is lowered toward the right and the second inclined surface 311b; And a fifth inclined surface 311e which is continuous with the right end of the four inclined surfaces 311d and which becomes lower toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43 and the like).

  In addition, the storage plate 311 is disposed between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c, with the partition wall 311f rising upward from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e and incapable of crossing the gaming ball. And a sixth inclined surface 311g which is lowered toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is disposed between the first inclined surface 311 a and the second inclined surface 311 b. Also, the second ball outlet 312 is normally in a closed state by the second ball extracting shutter 364 of the second ball removing mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of the present embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half of the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as illustrated. The second inclined surface 311 b has a pentagonal shape such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1⁄4 of the length of the storage tray 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311 c The third inclined surface 311 c has a horizontally long zoning shape in which the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In addition, the fourth inclined surface 311 d has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the length of the second inclined surface 311 b and decreases in length toward the second inclined surface 311 b. Furthermore, the fifth inclined surface 311 e extends from the left end to a right direction from the left end by a predetermined distance substantially in parallel with the third inclined surface 311 c and then extends obliquely toward the rear third inclined surface 311 c The partition wall 311f extends along the third inclined surface 311c with the front end (right end) extending rearward toward the right end of the rear end, as a whole, as a whole. It is formed in reverse character shape, and the partition wall 311f is formed along the rear side end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage tray 311 includes the left end and the front end of the first inclined surface 311 a, the front end of the fourth inclined surface 311 d, and the front end of the fifth inclined surface (right end The storage tray 311 is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the tray 310 by the outer peripheral wall 311h. Further, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that is directed forward as it goes to the right at the front end of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the gaming ball that has flowed from the ball inlet 341 onto the first inclined surface 311a abuts against the position facing the ball inlet 341 on the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e. It distributes on five inclined surfaces 311d. In addition, the fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope where the gaming balls having flowed into the storage plate 311 from the ball inlet 341 can be climbed up, and the direction thereof is after climbing to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e. To change in the direction (left direction) of the fourth inclined surface 311d. In other words, the storage tray 311 of this example allows the gaming ball, which has flowed in from the ball inlet 341, to once divert to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flows to the third inclined surface 311c serving as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g of the storage tray 311 has a steep inclination angle as compared with the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of gaming balls are arranged on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. The ball supply port 342 can be easily aligned in a line in the left-right direction. A stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c to improve the wear resistance of the circulating game balls, and to charge the static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end portion descends downward and descends downward to the rear right side. It is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball removal path 313, and by being continuous with the first ball removal path 313, a flow path that is folded back in the left-right direction is formed. At the boundary between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball removal path 313, the flow path is closed by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. The ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340 is opened so as to face the slide 356. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down the third inclined surface 311 c are distributed to the ball supply port 342 by blocking the flow down by the first ball removal slide 356.

  In the first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 of the disc body 310, the first ball is placed on the side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). A slide groove 316a in which the extraction slide 356 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction, and a first ball to be described later on the opposite side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313 with the slide groove 316a interposed therebetween. A flange portion 316 b for locking the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Dish unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the plate unit main body 320 in the plate unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the plate unit 300, covers the front surface of the plate body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and backward. A box-shaped main body portion 321 is provided. The main body portion 321 is configured such that about 3/4 of the left side in a front view bulges forward, and the lower speaker unit 390 is housed inside (rear side) of the bulged portion It has become. Further, the main body portion 321 has a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 at the center right of the front surface of the bulging portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball release button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed to penetrate therethrough. Furthermore, in the main body portion 321, an oval handle base attachment port 321d for attaching the handle base 303 to the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e disposed above the handle base attachment port 321d and facing a cylinder lock 1010 described later. And a duct-shaped duct opening 321f that opens on the right side surface of a portion bulging forward on the left side of the handle base attachment port d, and a compartment-shaped ball discharge port 321g that opens to a lower portion substantially in the left-right direction. Have.

  In the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300, the front back plate 322 which covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body 321 from the front side, and the speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 A plate-like right cover 323 arranged on the front corresponding to the speaker opening 321a and made of punching metal and cut off at four corners, and arranged substantially in the center of the front of the right cover 323 smaller than the right cover 323 and having a metallic luster on the surface Of the plate-shaped right ornament base 324 which has been plated, the right ornament 325 which is disposed approximately at the center of the front of the right ornament base 324 and is smaller than the right ornament base 324 and the main body of the front back plate 322 A plate-shaped plate which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321 and which is made of punching metal and whose four corners are cut off The left cover 326 and a plate-like left decoration base 327 which is disposed approximately at the center of the front of the left cover 326 and smaller in size than the left cover 326 and plated with metallic luster, and the front of the left decoration base 327 A frame shape which is disposed substantially at the center and which is smaller than the left decoration base 327 and has a plate-like left decoration 328 and the periphery of the speaker opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b and the second ball release button opening 321c of the main body 321 And a front main body 329 of the A plurality of through holes 322a penetrating to the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 are formed in the front back plate 322 of the plate unit main body 320, and the through holes 322a and the punching holes of the right decoration base 323 are formed. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be favorably transmitted to the outside through (not shown).

  Further, the plate unit main body 320 of this example is fixed to the front left of the main body 321 with the main left decoration base 330 fixed on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190 and the front of the main left decoration base 330 and plated with metallic luster It further has a main body left decoration 331 subjected to processing. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency, and can emit light and decoration by the LED 190 a of the lower left decoration substrate 190 disposed on the rear side of the main body left decoration base 330.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body 321, and a duct notch 333a where the duct cover faces from the surface; It further includes a main body right decoration 333 which covers the entire right side surface of the portion bulging forward in the portion 321 and is plated with a metallic luster on the surface.

  Further, the pan unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a disposed along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a main body decoration 334 having a metallic luster plated surface. An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guiding part 335a disposed in the main body part 321 below the main body decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body decoration 334, and arranged under the upper decoration lens 335 And a dished electric decoration board 336 on which a plurality of color LEDs 336a are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED 336a of the dish electric decoration board 336, the decoration on the main body decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be lighted and decorated through the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, etc., the back plate 340 of the plate unit 300 is entirely formed in a horizontally long plate shape, disposed in the upper left corner in a front view and having a horizontally long segment shape in the front-rear direction The ball inlet 341 penetrating through, the ball supply port 342 arranged at a predetermined distance away from the ball inlet 341 in the lower right direction and through which gaming balls can pass, and the rear in communication with the ball inlet 341 Mainly equipped with a square cylinder-shaped award ball contact 343 extending to the end. The ball inlet 341 of the back plate 340 is opened toward the inside of the storage plate 311 of the plate 310 as shown in FIG. 43 and the like, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311 a of the storage plate 311 The length is approximately the same as the length of the Further, the ball supply port 342 is disposed at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c of the storage tray 311 at a position corresponding to the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. In addition, the prize ball contact 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341, and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. It has a length, and the rear end penetrates the prize ball passage port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 to communicate with the outlet 921 of the lower end (front end) of the flow lower end (front end) of the front guiding passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  Further, the back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the winning ball communication ball 343 is reserved a predetermined amount rearward with respect to the ball inlet 341, and between the ball flow hole 341 and the winning ball communication ball 343. Further, the ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 which extends along the entire length in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341 and through which gaming balls can flow. The game ball having circulated the prize ball communication box 343 can be made to flow into the downstream side of the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311 by the shelf portion 344.

  Furthermore, the back plate 340 corresponds to the ball removal path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the ball flow path opening 345 penetrating in a substantially L shape and the ball flow at the upper left of the ball removal path opening 345 in front view And a latch opening 346 disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and through which the rear end of the latch unit 366 of the second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted. Between the ball insertion port 347 disposed in the upper right corner and penetrating in a substantially sectioned shape in a front view and the ball inlet 341 and the wiring insertion port 346, the ball unit 301 is disposed on the upper side of the back plate 340 And a ball unit mounting portion 348 for the game.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, as shown in FIG. 44, FIG. 45, FIG. 50, etc., the first ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 includes a first ball removing button 351 pressed by the player and a first ball removing button 351. A first ball release button base 352 slidably supported in the vertical direction and inserted from below to the first ball removal button mounting port 315 of the bowl 310, and a plate on the top of the first ball removal button base 352 Supported by the first ball release button decoration 353 to which the first ball release button 351 is fixed so as to protrude upward with the body 310 interposed, the first ball release button decoration 353 and the first ball release button base 352 Shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball drawing mechanism support portion 316 of the disc body 311 which is the right side (left side in FIG. 50) in a front view of the lower end of the first ball drawing button 351 354 times Inverted L-shaped first ball-extracting crank 355 in which one end is brought into contact with the lower end of the first ball-extracting button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first ball-extracted crank 355 The first lower end of the plate body 311 is slidably supported substantially in the left-right direction by the first lower end mechanism support portion 316 of the disc body 311 and the third inclined surface 311 c of the disc body 310 and the first open path 313 And a first ball removing spring 357 for urging the first ball removing crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 can be slid in the left-right direction by being inserted into the slide groove 316 a of the first ball removal mechanism support portion 316 in the disc body 310. In this state, by rotating the first ball removing crank 355, the lower end on the other end side of the first ball removing crank 355 is slid in the left-right direction. When the first ball removing slide 356 slides in the left-right direction, the tip end portion advances and retracts into the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish 310 and the first ball removing path 313. The game ball having flowed through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342 by advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, and the flow path is set back from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls distributed in the third inclined surface 311 c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball release spring 357 is engaged with the first ball release crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball release button 351 with the pivot shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A ridge portion 355a is formed. The first ball release spring 357 has its upper end locked to the flange 355a of the first ball release crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball release mechanism support 316 in the disc body 310. By stopping the first ball removing crank 355, the position at which the first ball removing slide 356 closes the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313, and the first ball removing button 351 is the most It can be biased to turn in the direction of the raised position.

  In this first ball removing mechanism 350, when the player presses the first ball removing button 351, the first ball removing crank 355 is in contact with the lower end portion of the first ball removing button 351 via the contact pin 355b. Rotates against the biasing force of the first ball release spring 357 so that one end moves downward, and the other end moves away from the boundary between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball removal path 313. Move to Then, the first ball removing slide 356 moves along with the lower end of the first ball removing crank 355 in a direction away from the boundary between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball removing path 313, and the tip of the first ball removing slide 356 The third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball pulling path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from within the flow path of the boundary portion, and all gaming balls in the third inclined surface 311 c, ie, the storage plate 311, are It can discharge | emit outside via the removal path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removing button 351 is released, the first ball removing crank 355 is rotated by the biasing force of the first ball removing spring 357, and the first ball removing button 351 is raised, and the first ball is released. The tip of the extraction slide 356 advances into the flow path of the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball extraction path 313 to close the flow path, and on the third inclined surface 311 c (in the storage tray 311). The game balls can be supplied to the ball striking device 650 via the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball removing mechanism 360 in the plate unit 300 is a second ball projecting forward from the second ball removing button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the plate unit main body 320. A second ball removal slide 362 supported by a lower speaker unit 390 (described later) slidably supported by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and a front and rear of the second ball removal slide 362. Rod-shaped second ball removing crank 363 which is pivotally supported about the shaft extending in the left and right direction by the lower speaker unit 390 by the lower speaker unit 390 and the disc body 310 by the rotation of the second ball removing crank 363 Pivoting about an axis extending vertically between a closed position closing the second ball outlet 312 and an open position opening the second ball outlet 312 A second ball release spring 364 for urging the second ball release shutter 364 to a closed position where the second ball release opening 312 is closed, and a second ball release spring 365 A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball release shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal opening 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball release shutter 364 A second ball-scissoring base 367 having a portion 367a and fixed to the lower side of the tray 310, slidably holding the rear end of the second ball-sliding slide 362, and supporting the latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removing mechanism support 368 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) rotatably supporting the second ball removing crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390; To have.

  The second ball removing slide 362 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a which is opened upward at the rear end and into which the lower end of the second ball removing crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes backward from the rear end An engagement protrusion 362 b engageable with the engagement claw 366 a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removing crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion thereof is inserted from above into the transmission groove 362 a of the second ball removing slide 362 and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390. When the second ball removing slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362 a, and the second ball removing crank 363 rotates. The upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 is moved in the opposite direction to the lower end portion.

  In addition, the second ball removing shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removing slide 362 as shown, and the second ball removing port 312 of the disc body 310 and the opening 367 a of the second ball removing base 367 are A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) planar viewable closeable plate-shaped closing portion 364a and a rod-shaped buttock extending from the closing portion 364a to one side in the left-right direction (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 51) And 364b, and is formed in a substantially P shape as a whole. In addition, while the tip of the collar portion 364b is pivotally supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction by the disc body 310 and the second ball drain base 367, the second ball lift shutter 364 is rotatably supported by the collar portion 364b. An upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 abuts on a substantially middle portion in the left-right direction on the rear side of the second ball removal crank. Further, the front end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is engaged with the rear base end portion of the collar portion 364 b of the second ball release shutter 364. Although the illustration is omitted, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked to the locking boss which is suspended downward from the lower surface of the disc body 310. Thus, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to be in the closed position (the position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removal opening 312.

  In addition, the second ball removing base 367 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 can pass the upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 between the opening 367 a and the position at which the second ball removing shutter 364 is pivotally supported. The upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 axially supported on the lower side of the second ball removing base 367 through the slit 367 b is provided with a slit 367 b extending in the front-rear direction, the upper surface of the second ball removing base 367 It can come in contact with the collar portion 364b of the second ball release shutter 364 disposed at the In addition, the second ball removing base 367 is formed in a shallow plate shape as shown in the figure, and can be formed with the plate body 310 so as to form a storage space for storing the second ball removing shutter 364. There is. Further, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball release shutter 364 is smaller and lower than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the second ball release shutter 364 is pivoted to make the second ball release opening 312 The game ball is prevented from entering between the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 even when the is in the open state.

  In the second ball removing mechanism 360 of this embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removing button 361 projecting forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removing slide 362 slides backward, and The second ball removing crank 363 is rotated such that the lower end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 is moved rearward while being guided by the transmission groove 362 a of the double ball removing slide 362. Then, by rotating the second ball removing crank 363, the upper end moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end, and the second ball removing shutter 364 abuts on the upper end of the second ball removing crank 363. However, against the biasing force of the second ball removing spring 365, the closing portion 364a is pivoted to move forward about the tip of the collar portion 364b. Thus, when the closing portion 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the disc 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball outlet base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 is opened. The gaming ball stored on the upstream side of the tray unit 300 is discharged to the lower outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball opening 312.

  The second ball removing mechanism 360 of the present embodiment is provided with a latch unit 366, and the second ball removing button 361 is pushed to engage the engaging projections 362b at the rear end of the second ball removing slide 362 with the latch unit 366 as a pair. When it abuts between the engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a close and engage so as to sandwich the engaging projection 362b, and the second ball removing spring 365 resists the biasing force of the second ball removing spring A state in which the button 361 is pressed, that is, the second ball outlet 312 can be held in an open (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball outlet shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 is opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusion 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 The closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 can be returned to the position for closing the second ball removal opening 312.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the plate unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310 in the plate unit 300 as shown in FIGS. A pair of an octagonal main button 371 with four corners cut off in a plan view and a left subbutton 372L and a right subbutton 372R in a plan view disposed symmetrically on the left and right sides of the main button 371, respectively. The sub button 372, the operation button unit base 373 which holds the main button 371 and the sub button 372 slidably in the vertical direction and is inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and Plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface, and operation button unit Color LED375a which is fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 Tobesu 373 is provided with an operation button unit substrate 375 in which a plurality mounted on an upper surface, a.

  Further, the operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 for detecting the operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L for detecting the operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub for detecting the operation of the right sub button 372R. And a button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub-button sensor 377L, and the right sub-button sensor 377L are each a photo sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and are fixed at predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375. .

  The operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a main button receiving recess 373a which has a substantially rhombic shape in plan view and can receive the main button 371 from above, and a main button receiving portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b formed on the inner peripheral surface and extending in the vertical direction, the upper part of which is opened to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed on the bottom of the main button recess 373a. 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d for guiding light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 which is opened with a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a and which is disposed below, The button 372 is formed at a diagonal corner of the major axis with a pair of sub-button receiving recesses 373e that can receive the button 372 from above. Plate-like top plate portion 373g forming the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and plate-like drooping so as to surround the outer periphery from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g A side wall portion 373 h is mainly provided.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape whose lower surface is opened by the top plate portion 373g and the side wall portion 373h, and a plurality of main button accommodation concave portions 373a are formed at predetermined positions of the top plate portion 373g. Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub button accommodation recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. Further, in the operation button unit base 373, the main button housing recess portion 373a is formed thick in a portion where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are enhanced. At the same time, the respective light guide openings 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a are formed in a cylindrical shape which is long in the vertical direction, respectively, even by the outer peripheral wall of these cylindrical light guide openings 373d. The main button receiving recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 forms an upper surface of the main button 371 and supports the main button lens 371a having translucency, and the main button lens 371a, and a cylinder whose upper and lower sides are opened. -Shaped main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder which wraps around the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via a mounting screw 371d And 371e. Although not shown, the upper end of the main button 371 abuts on the lower side surface of the main button base 371a, and the lower end abuts on the bottom surface of the main button recess 373a of the operation button unit base 373 The main button spring 371 is biased to move upward.

  The main button lens 371a of the main button 371 is formed in a box shape whose plan view is octagonal and the lower surface is open, and the front surface side is smooth, while a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back surface side. A portion is formed so that the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 can be widely diffused, and the entire surface of the main button 370 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, the main button base 371b has an outer shape on the upper end side of the octagonal shape similar to that of the main button lens 371 as shown in the figure, but a conical shape in which the lower end side narrows downward from the substantially middle part in the vertical direction. The lower end portion of the operation button base 373 extends downward from the opening 373c formed in the bottom of the main button receiving recess 373a and directly above the LED 375a group disposed at the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. It can be located in The main button base 371b includes main locking claws 371f extending downward from two opposing sides, and a plurality of vertically extending guide ribs inserted into the guide grooves 373b of the operation button unit base 373. It has 371g. When the main locking claw 371 f of the main button base 371 b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373 a of the operation button unit base 373, the main button 371 is a main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button receiving recess 373a from coming out by the biasing force of the key.

  Furthermore, the main button base 371b is configured to be able to attach the vibrating body 371c to the inside of one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and at the portion where the vibrating body 371c is attached. Inside, a detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed.

  When the main button 371 in this example is pressed downward against the biasing force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371h of the main button base 371b is between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the main button sensor 376. The operation is detected by the main button sensor 376. Further, when the main button 371 detects an operation by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is operated, and the main button 371 is vibrated by the operation of the vibrating body 371c. As well as being able to recognize that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the main button 371. A light shielding plate 375b is attached to the operation button unit substrate 375 for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to the light from the mounted LED 375a.

  Further, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 supports the sub button lens 372 a having a substantially isosceles right-angled triangle shape in plan view and the light transmitting property, and the sub button lens 372 a on the upper surface of home base shape in plan view. A sub-button base 372 b accommodated in the sub-button accommodation recess 373 e of the operation button unit base 373 and disposed below the sub-button lens 372 a between the sub-button base 372 b and the bottom surface of the sub-button accommodation recess 373 e And a sub-button spring 372c that biases the button base 372b in a direction to raise it. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 has sub-locking claws 372d hanging downward from the back and forth across the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-like guide wall 372e hanging downward from the long side of the home base shape. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall 372e.

  In the sub button 372, the sub locking claw 372d is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button accommodation recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. By locking 372 d to the locking portion, it is possible to prevent the sub button 372 from coming out of the sub button accommodation recess 373 e by the biasing force of the sub button spring 372 c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the biasing force of the sub button spring 372 c, the detection piece 372 f of the sub button base 372 b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377 An operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape having a substantially rhombic plan view shape, and the main button lens 371 a of the main button 371 and two sub buttons 372 An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372 can pass is formed, and a translucent decorative member lens 374b is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . A mounting hole 374c through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed at a diagonal corner of the long axis, and the mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373 are formed. The operation button unit 370 is attached and fixed to the plate 310 by a predetermined attachment screw. In the present example, a screw concealment 378 that hides the two attachment holes 374c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and the rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is less likely to be broken even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. Further, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate body 310, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or a failure occurs. , Can be easily removed and replaced from the upper side of the plate body 310. Furthermore, since the lower part of the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later via the plate body 310, impact resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 etc. The property is further enhanced, and not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire plate unit 300 is less likely to be damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 has a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speakers 121 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100; A box-like speaker box 392 is mainly provided, which holds the speaker 391 at a position on the front right side in front view and on the rear side of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 of the dish unit main body 320. The lower speaker unit 390 of this embodiment is a bass reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the opening 392a, and it is possible to emit more deep bass to the diameter of the lower speaker 391 It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a position facing the duct opening 321f of the main body portion 321 in the plate unit main body 320, and the flow of air flowing in and out of the speaker box 392 by the vibration of the lower speaker 391 is It comes in and out through the duct opening 321f. In addition, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by the drive (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 so that the flow of air (wind) from the lower speaker 391 can be applied to the player's hand, so that the player can feel and feel unprecedented. There is. By sending an acoustic signal with a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321 f, and is matched with the vibrating body 371 c of the main button 371. This makes it possible to enjoy tactile effects that are not found in conventional gaming machines.

  Further, the speaker box 392 is disposed downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction port 312 of the dish 310 on the rear surface thereof, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction port 312 A ball removal path 393 is provided for guiding the played game ball to the lower part of the substantially center of the speaker box 392 in the left-right direction. The ball removal path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape whose rear is opened, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball removal path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the plate unit 300 The back side is closed by a ball removal path cover 191 which closes the ball removal path opening 111 of 110. In addition, the game balls distributed in the ball releasing path 393 are discharged downward from the dish unit 300 from the ball discharge port 321g of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320.

  Further, the speaker box 392 includes a second ball slide holding hole 394 for slidably holding the front end of the second ball slide 362 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360 in the upper left side in a front view, And a second ball pulling mechanism support portion 395 disposed on the rear side of the double ball pulling slide holding hole 394 and supporting a second ball pulling mechanism support 368 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360. The second ball removing mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removing slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removing mechanism support portion 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 and the like, the handle device 400 in the pan unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower surface of the open side of the door frame 5, and a door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. The joint unit 180 is assembled with the back surface of the joint member 180 and cooperates with a rotary shaft 415 that rotates in response to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 410, and changes the rotary motion of the rotary shaft 415 into a sliding motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is mounted on the handlebar support cylinder portion of the cylindrical handle base 303 so as to project forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. It is inserted and fixed to 303a. The handle support cylindrical portion 303 a is formed so as to be inclined toward the outside (right side) in a plan view as viewed from the top of the pachinko machine 1, and hence the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed to the handle support cylindrical portion 303 a. Also in a plan view, the door frame is inclined outward (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) to open the door frame It will be attached and fixed to 5. As described above, by inclining the operation handle portion 410 outward in plan view, the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410, and there is an advantage that the user can easily perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable in the turning operation. In the present embodiment, as described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an angle, the rotational movement of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilient force of the bat firing device 650 is A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. In addition, after the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support cylindrical portion 303a, the operation handle portion 410 is formed by connecting the handle support cylindrical portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) with a screw or the like. It can not be pulled out from the handle support cylindrical portion 303a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported between the front grip member 412, the rear grip member 413, the front grip member 412, and the rear grip member 413. An operation member 414, a linear cylindrical rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 which is fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. In the rear grip member 413, a small diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylindrical portion 303a and a large diameter portion at the front of the small diameter portion are integrally formed, and an axial through hole 418 through which the rotation shaft 415 penetrates It is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotary shaft 415 penetrated to the shaft through hole 418 through the bearing bush 417 penetrates the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 fixed to the front side of the rear grip member 413 and The shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center is fitted.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a protrusion for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 and a mounting hole (both not shown) are provided, and the single-shot button 421 is swingably supported. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and the touch sensor 420, the firing stop switch 422 and the one-shot button 421 are attached to the protrusions, the mounting holes and the swing pin. Then, in the state where they are attached, a wiring through cylinder having a wiring through hole 419 formed on the side of the axial through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422. It derives from the portion 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal board 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414, a biasing spring 425 is provided so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415, and this biasing spring 425 always always rotates the rotation operation member 414. It is made to return to the position of. Furthermore, the switch contact convex portion 427 is provided to protrude on the outside of the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414, and when the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 425, the switch contact The convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422, and when the turning operation member 414 is turned by the player, the switch contact protrusion 427 is the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 Let go away and turn it on. In addition, since the single-shot button 421 can be swung with the firing stop switch 422 ON, pressing the single-shot button 421 enables the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to be turned OFF. ing.

  Conductive plating is applied to the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414, and when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414, the touch sensor 420 detects the contact. Then, when the player turns the rotation operation member 414 so that the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects a touch, the shooting motor 695 (see FIG. 91) of the bat firing device 650 described later. ) Is rotationally driven.

  Further, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a ball shape, and is brought into contact with the cam of a slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later as the rotating shaft 415 rotates. The portion 182 d is pressed to slide in one direction. And in this embodiment, the inclined attachment in plan view of the operation handle portion 410 as described above is achieved by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 to the handle support cylindrical portion 303 a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110 c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182c of the slide body 182. In this case, the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5 by attaching the operation handle portion 410 in an inclined manner in plan view, but the cam engagement concave portion 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Because of the space width, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engagement recess 182c. In the storage state, as shown in FIG. 59A, the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the cam-like cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is supposed to be located in space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the above-described state, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 rotates accordingly, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), The slide body 182 is in one direction (right side direction in the case of FIG. 59) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and one outer surface of the cam 416 (the outer surface of the rotation front). Slide to That is, the rotational movement of the rotation shaft 415 is converted to the sliding movement of the slide body 182. Therefore, in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. 59A, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 and the end side of the slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 in the advancing direction The rotation results in a distance S2 larger than the distance S1. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by the distance of "S2-S1". Then, the slide movement of the slide projection 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650, as shown in FIGS. 57, 60, 61, and the biasing spring 684 of the ball striking device 650. By adjusting the tension of FIG. 91), the strength of the biasing force of the hitting ball 687 can be adjusted to obtain the resilience of the player's desired batting ball. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the striking device 650 will be described in detail after the description of the striking device 650.

  The wire drawn from the inside of the operation handle portion 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through cylinder portion 428 and the wiring opening 184c is axially supported along the lower surface of the back surface of the door frame 5. And is then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the dispensing control substrate 1186 that is collectively attached to the substrate unit 1100 attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 3. .

[1-2C-9. Operation effect of dish unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the gaming balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 62 and 63. In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 described later flow into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 through the full ball unit 900 and the prize ball contact 343 of the back plate 340. The gaming balls having flowed in from the ball inlet 341 first flow into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side in front view are lower, and the gaming balls having flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 are along the inclination of the first inclined surface 311a. It comes in contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inlet 341 of the outer peripheral wall 311 h surrounding the front outer periphery of the storage tray 311. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved shape with respect to the surface of the plate back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the gaming ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the gaming ball, which flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and is reflected to the right by the outer peripheral wall 311h, passes the fourth inclined surface 311d and enters the fifth inclined surface 311e. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side in the front view, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle of the fifth inclined surface 311e is such that the gaming ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a can be uphill. The game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper part (right end in plan view) of the fifth inclined surface 311e while going up the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e is divided by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f from the front side to the rear side around the right end, and the gaming ball entering the fifth inclined surface 311e is around it The fifth inclined surface 311e is returned to the fourth inclined surface 311d side disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to substantially follow the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f surrounding the.

  The gaming ball having entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e circulates to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d. It enters from the inclined surface 311 b to the right third inclined surface 311 c and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the plate back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311 c. It has become. That is, the gaming balls having flowed into the storage plate 311 from the ball supply port 341 do not directly go from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a Once entering the fifth inclined surface 311e through the fourth inclined surface 311d, the ball is led to the third inclined surface 311c through the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b. It is possible to divert the game ball which has flowed in from 341.

  As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored by effectively using the entire storage tray 311, and the game balls stored in a state of little storage like the conventional pachinko machine may block the ball inlet 341 In the game, the game is interrupted because the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is activated to stop the payout of the game ball or the game ball launch operation on the ball launcher 650 is stopped. Can be well prevented.

  By the way, many gaming balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of this example, and the ball inlet 341 is closed by the gaming balls stored, and the prize ball communication ball 343 of the plate back plate 340 and the prize When the gaming balls stay in the full tank unit 900 disposed between the ball unit 800, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 operates to stop the payout of the gaming balls from the winning ball unit 800 or Since the player can stop the game ball firing operation on the ball launcher 650, and the game can not but be stopped when the ball launcher 650's firing operation is stopped, the player holds When the game balls stored in the plate 311 become an appropriate amount, the first ball release button 351 and the second ball release button 361 are operated to arrange the game balls from the storage plate 311 below the plate unit 300 Containers (for example, dollar box) needs to be discharged to. In the present embodiment, when the full tank switch 916 is activated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball firing device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game balls from the inside of the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pressing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the plate unit 300. Slide to release the closing between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311 c and the first ball releasing path 313, and allow the gaming ball of the third inclined surface 311 c to flow down to the first ball extracting path 313, It can discharge | emit from the ball | bowl discharge port 321g to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 via the extraction | drawer path | pass 393. By operating the first ball release button 351, the gaming balls can be removed from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c at the lowest position in the storage tray 311, so that all gaming balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. It can be done. However, in the ball removal by the operation of the first ball removal button 351, since the gaming balls are aligned in a line on the third inclined surface 311c, there is a problem that it takes time for the ball removal.

  Then, when the second ball removing button 361 disposed on the front left side of the plate unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removing shutter 364 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 is moved and the second in the storage plate 311 is moved. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the gaming ball on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312, and the ball unit from the ball outlet 321g via the ball outlet path 393 It is possible to discharge below 300 (see FIG. 62 (B)). The second ball outlet 312 is an opening several times larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, as shown in the figure, so that many gaming balls can be quickly discharged at one time. Therefore, the presence of the two buttons of the first ball release button 351 and the second ball release button 361 allows the player to select the length of time for which the ball is to be released. Also, when a big hit occurs during the game, a large amount of balls will be paid out to the plate unit 300, and if this is left to continue the game, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the plate unit 300 (see FIG. Although the payout operation is stopped due to the function of 111) being stopped or the bullet action is stopped and there is a big hit, there is a possibility that the hitting action of the game ball is stopped and the game can not be continued In such a case, by operating the second ball release button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed and the supply of the balls to the launch position is maintained, and the game during the big hit is maintained. It is possible to continue.

  Further, in the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removing button 361 is operated, the second ball removing shutter 364 is held at the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removing mechanism 360, and the second ball removing port A state 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and the game balls on the first inclined surface 311 a are almost gone, the game balls flowing from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. And the second inclined surface 311b on the downstream side of the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the second ball outlet 312 while reflecting on the outer peripheral wall 311h and circulating in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e. A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311 c is consumed by the firing operation of the ball launcher 650, the second inclined surface 311 b, as long as the game ball flows from the ball inlet 341 into the storage tray 311, The gaming ball is supplied to the third sloping surface 311 c via the fourth sloping surface 311 d and the fifth sloping surface 311 e, and the firing operation of the gaming ball is stopped to increase the number of gaming balls that have flowed in to the third sloping surface 311 c. Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, it is possible to always secure a certain amount of gaming balls in the storage tray 311 and continue the game even with the second ball outlet 312 open. ing. That is, even in a state in which the game balls are continuously paid out during the big hit game etc., the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of the game balls in the storage tray 311.

  In the plate unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the storage plate 311 of the plate 310 has a bottom surface continuous with the first inclined surface 311a, the second inclined surface 311b, and the third inclined surface 311c. While it becomes lower toward the right direction (the ball supply port 342) when viewed visually, the ball inlet 341 of the back plate 340 is a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction Therefore, a step is supposed to be formed between the bottom of the reservoir plate 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step becomes larger as it goes to the right in front view. ing. The difference in level between the bottom of the storage plate 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 is almost uniform at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball at the right end of the ball inlet 341 There is also a slightly higher step. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the winning ball communication rod 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As the difference in level is small, the potential energy (falling energy) of the gaming ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is also small, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is broken. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the storage amount of gaming balls in the storage tray 311 increases and many gaming balls are stored also on the first inclined surface 311 a, the ball entrance 341 from the ball inlet 341 The game balls flowing into the storage plate 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 from the side, and the forces in the lateral direction acted on the respective game balls pushed the game balls together. It becomes a state. In this state, when the gaming balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the gaming balls are arranged in the vicinity of the upstream of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the gaming balls are pushed against each other to reduce the fluidity of the gaming balls and clogging may occur. However, in this example, as described above, the ball inlet 341 is in the left-right direction Since it is made into the extended rectangular shape, the game ball from prize ball contact 343 can flow directly into the 2nd slope 311b through shelf part 344, and can supply a game sphere to the 3rd slope 311c. (See FIG. 62 (B)).

  In addition, since the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the gaming ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 at the right side of the center of the ball inlet 341 in the lateral direction, The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and it is suppressed that the game balls push each other in the lateral direction, and the fluidity of the game balls is It is possible to prevent the lowering, and the game balls flowing in from the top (especially the game balls in contact with the front of the back plate 340) are urged to move in the lateral direction, naturally It is possible to eliminate clogging of the ball (see FIG. 63).

  Thus, even if the amount of gaming balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases, the storage tray 300 of this example has the gaming balls paid out from the winning ball unit 800 as a shelf of the ball inlet 341 of the horizontally long. Since the game balls are made to flow to the upper side of the gaming balls stored in the storage tray 311 via the portion 344, clogging of the gaming balls in the storage tray 311 can be favorably prevented from occurring. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player by continuing the game without worrying about the game balls in the tray 311.

[1-2 D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 64 to FIG. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit disassembled and shown from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 from the rear. As shown in the figure, the glass unit 450 has an opening larger than the game window 101, and is formed of a synthetic resin, and has an annular octagonal unit frame 451 and two front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 451. A transparent glass plate 452 and a strip-shaped glass decorative substrate 453 disposed along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a open on the rear side and into which the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b opening from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 in the approximate center in the front-rear direction, a terminal plate support 451d projecting leftward from the upper end on the left in front view, and an outer periphery closer to the center in the vertical direction It has a stop piece 451e which respectively protrudes in the left and right direction from the position, and a locking projection 451f which respectively protrudes outward in the left and right direction from both ends of the lower side.

  In addition, the glass decoration substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-shaped and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the surface side (the inner surface side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decoration substrate and fixed to the glass decoration relay terminal plate 454 supported by the terminal plate support 451 d of the unit frame 451 and the end portion of the glass decoration substrate 453 to the glass decoration relay terminal plate 454 And a terminal plate holder 456 covering the terminal plate support 451 d of the unit frame 451 supporting the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

  In the glass unit 450, with the glass decorative substrate 453 inserted in the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the glass plate 452 is adhesively fixed on the front and back of the unit frame 451. Then, in the glass unit 450, the engagement groove 451c formed on the outer peripheral lower side of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bending projection 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper 451e and The locking projection 451 f is fitted from the rear side into the glass unit support stepped portion 110 a of the door frame base main body 110, and then can be detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the locking lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 can emit light and decorate between the two glass plates 452 by appropriately emitting the LED 453 a of the glass decoration substrate 453, and an atmosphere different from that of the conventional pachinko machine ( The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to have the gaming window 101 of the mood).

[1-2 E. Security cover]
Then, the crime prevention cover 470 in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.21 and FIG.22. The crime prevention cover 470 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 described above to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 4, and as shown in the drawing, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape to cover the lower part of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing sheet metals 142 and 143, and the upper side is an arc-shaped abutting recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4 And a rear projection 474 is provided to project rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, in the state where the crime prevention cover 470 is attached, a crime prevention rear end projection piece 475 is formed so as to be inclined and formed on the back surface on the shaft support side. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, the crime prevention front projection 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 with the crime prevention cover 470 attached is provided in a protruding manner. A mounting elastic piece 473 to be formed is formed to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5 by attaching the attachment elastic piece 473 to the attachment opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the front protrusion 472 for crime prevention faces the lower back single side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. As shown in FIG. Further, the front end of the security front projection piece 472 is in contact with the vertical bending projection piece 151. In addition, although the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting backward, when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the pivotally supported side of the post-crime projecting piece 474 is Although the lower side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 is in a state of facing and facing, the half on the open side of the projecting piece 474 is the rail crime formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 It will be in the state where it is inserted in the groove 607, and the security rear end projection 475 will be in a polymeric position along the upper surface of the security projection 608 formed on the pivoting side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76) ).

  Thus, in the state where the crime prevention cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the crime prevention structure by the door frame protrusion 110 d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the crime prevention protrusion 166 and crime prevention space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by and, even if it is attempted to invade an illegal tool from below the glass unit 450, the intrusion of the illegal tool from the lower front side of the crime prevention cover 470 due to the superposition of the projection for preventing crime 472 and the unit frame 451. Is prevented, and the superposition of the projection 474 after the crime prevention and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 prevents the entry of the unauthorized tool from the lower side of the rear surface of the crime prevention cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of the illegal tool from the obliquely lower side of the pivoting side of the door frame 5, the overlapping structure of the security projection 608 and the security rear end projecting piece 475 prevents the intrusion of the incorrect tool into the outer rail 602. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-security protrusion 474 makes it possible to prevent the entry of unauthorized tools into the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-mentioned open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 against the intrusion of the improper tool from the diagonally lower side of the open side of the door frame 5, The concavo-convex engagement of the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-security projection piece 474 can further prevent the entry of unauthorized tools into the game area 605 of the game board 4. In addition, the vertical surface between the crime prevention protrusion 474 and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 on the back side of the crime prevention cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball, it also has a function of preventing the striking of the hitting passage against the glass plate 452 which flies or reverses the guiding passage portion.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching a component, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching a component, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before attaching a component 70 is a side view of 500, FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before the parts are attached, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame 3 with the parts attached FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the main frame 3 mounted with parts pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main frame 3 with parts mounted, FIG. And FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine 1 (main control board box 624 portion), as viewed from the back of the main body frame 3 with parts attached. .

  In the main unit frame 3 of the present embodiment, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hit ball launch device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for paying out a prize ball, a tank rail member 740 and a ball passage unit 770, a prize ball unit 800 (corresponding to the dispensing unit of the present invention), a full tank unit 900, a lock device 1000 for locking the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and locking the door frame 5 to the main frame 3, A substrate unit 1100 including various control boards for controlling the electric components provided on the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 except 4 and a power supply board 1136 and the like, and a cover 1250 covering the rear opening 580 , And the like are provided with a main body frame main body 500 to which various parts such as.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the various components described above are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, upper and lower support brackets 503 and 509 (both shown in FIG. 71) for supporting the main frame 3 on the outer frame 2 at the upper and lower sides on one side of the main frame main body 500 are attached. When the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 are attached to the shaft support bracket mounting steps 501, 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The side is substantially coplanar with the upper side and the side of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower side and the side of the main frame main body 500 are substantially coplanar with the lower side and the side of the lower shaft support 509 (see FIG. See 73). Here, the upper shaft support 503 and the lower shaft support 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. FIG. The upper shaft support bracket 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and the upper end side thereof protrudes forward, and the shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward. A door shaft support hole 505 is drilled on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support fitting 509 has an attachment portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally protruded on the lower end side and a slightly upper portion thereof. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 to the lower support bracket 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is a part of the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 to the main body frame 3 is configured. Therefore, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support projection 68 of the lower support bracket 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower shaft support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. An axial support hole 508 for inserting the projecting axial pin 147 is bored.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof becomes a game board installation recessed portion 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4 An area slightly recessed below the gaming board installation concave portion 510 is a plate portion 511. Further, the front upper side and the front open side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed to have a predetermined width so as to face the back of the door frame 5, and the front upper side is The upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by the projection projecting in parallel in the lateral direction, and the side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outside on the front open side of the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed by an inner wall which is an inclined surface whose rear end is connected to the first side wall 540, and the front side support side of the left side viewed from the front is the front upper side or the front open Unlike the side part, it is not formed to have a predetermined width facing the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front side supporting side part of the main body frame main body 500 is forward compared to the front upper side part and the front open side part. The shaft support 587 (see FIG. 110) has a large amount of protrusion.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed in the front upper side is bent toward the rear on both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached and fixed to the upper side back of the door frame 5 The bent pieces 155 and 156 to be inserted are respectively inserted. Further, the side crime prevention groove 582 and the crime prevention recess 583 formed on the front open side are folded backward at both long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the back of the open portion of the door frame 5. The open side outer bending projection piece 153 and the open side inner bending projection piece 154 to be bent are respectively inserted. Furthermore, the front end L-shaped bent protrusion piece 157 of the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 is mounted on the back support side 587 of the front side support side. The parts are in contact.

  And, with the above-mentioned structure, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of inserting an illegal tool such as a piano wire from the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. It has a structure that can prevent cheating on the side and the upper side where cheating is likely to occur next. Of course, prevention of cheating due to the contact between the support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support L-shaped bent piece 157 works well, but in most cases the support side is Between the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 as compared with the upper side and the open side, since the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected by the support brackets 45, 66 and the pivot brackets 503, 509. It is difficult to make a gap in For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure is used. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition, the front upper side, the front open side, and the front shaft support side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 have upper, middle, lower portions of the front open side other than the above-described configuration. A door hook hole 549 is made to penetrate through a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in a lock device 1000 described later attached to the open side back surface of the main body frame 3 and popped forward, In addition, a panel positioning projection 576 (see FIG. 70, FIG. 71, etc.) for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole in which the end of the game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open plane and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement unit 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed approximately at the center of the game board placement unit 512, the game board A passage support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in the fourth direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the rail mounting bosses 514 are projected at predetermined intervals from the center portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the end portion on the open side. 71) is screwed in place. In addition, a rail connecting member 516 is provided in a projecting manner on the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the firing rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 It is adjacent to the connection passage 609 (see FIG. 76) which is the downstream end of the line 603.

  In addition, the upper end portion of the game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) of an oval shape for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 to the side position of the rail connection member 516 (the position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely downward. That is, the game board fixture 519 is rotatably provided centering on the fixture mounting boss 517, and is rotated clockwise in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board placement unit 512 and the game board is mounted. The fixing tool 519 is pressed to the front of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. In addition, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by rotating the game board fixing tool 519 in the counterclockwise direction and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 can not be rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower side of the open side of the plate portion 511 is provided with a cuboid propelling device attachment portion 520 which is provided in a bulging shape on the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 is fixed to the mounting part 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This point will be described in detail later. A handle connection window 522 is formed in the front wall portion of the above-mentioned launcher attachment portion 520, in which a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) that cooperates with the slide projection 183 of the joint unit 180 described above is accommodated. At the adjacent position of the handle connection window 522, a shaft hole 523 is opened in which the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the hitting ball 687 faces. Further, in the upper wall portion of the launcher attachment portion 520, a weir through opening 521 for projecting the striking rod 687 of the striking launcher 650 upward is cut out, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the weir penetrating opening 521 The cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 penetrates is formed in the front of the.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 68, a ball extraction passage 524 extending downward from the upper portion on the support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 is formed. . The ball removal and discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball removal and connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71) described later from the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 into the inside of the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 is provided to project rearward above the above-described launcher attachment portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is formed in the guide protrusion 525. It is inserted to facilitate the mounting of the substrate unit 1100. Further, mounting holes 527 for mounting the substrate unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate portion 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the substrate unit 1100 correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fixed with screws. In addition, a projecting device mounting boss 529 for attaching the ball hitting and projecting device 650 is projected rearward in the concave inside of the projecting device mounting portion 520, and further, in the lower end on the open side, as shown in FIG. As shown, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide protuberance piece having a tapered distal end for guiding the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 is projected toward the rear.

  In the plate portion 511, in addition to the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 70, a ball connection opening 530 which is an opening of the upstream end of the ball extraction and discharge passage 524 is formed on the upper surface of the end portion on the support side. . The downstream end of the ball connection passage 880 is connected to the ball connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball removal connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full tank mounting portion 531 for mounting the full tank unit 900 (see FIG. 71) described in detail later will be orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engaging groove 532 is formed on the front of the full unit mounting portion 531 and engages with the engaging piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full unit 900. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, on the front surface of the plate portion 511 in front of the full unit mounting portion 531, an outlet for blocking the prize balls discharged from the outlet 921 of the full unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened. A switching device 579 is provided.

  Although this outlet opening and closing device 579 will not be described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening and closing plate is lowered by the lever abutting on the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, since the contact with the lever is lost, the opening and closing plate is raised to close the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the winning balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall from the outlet 921. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole is vertically formed at a position corresponding to the upper side of the launch portion of the launch rail 515, which is the game board placement portion 512 formed along the upper edge of the plate portion 511 A fastening link 534 for forming a fastening band 619 in the front part of the fastening hole 533 is formed. The fastening link 534 is a mechanism for preventing removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. The game board installation concave portion 510 is provided on the first side wall 540 provided on the back side from the inner side face on the pivotal support side and the above-mentioned upper side portion and the open side side face surface, and on the rear side from the first side wall 540 The main body frame 3 is constituted by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542 provided on the rear side from the second side wall 541, and the fourth side wall 543 provided on the rear side from the third side wall 542. The left and right sides and the rear part of the upper side are formed in a concave shape that is enclosed.

  Note that the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed so that the upper side and the right side (side of the pivot support side) are straightly extended rearwardly with a step when viewed from the rear side. The open side is formed in a step shape (see FIG. 75) which inclines inward as it goes from the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543. This is the rearmost end of the fourth side wall 543 when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 is formed straight backward on the left side (open side). May come in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 and may not open smoothly, so the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side It is something that can be done.

  Also, at the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the open side first side wall 540, but using the lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540 In order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the first side wall 540 on the open side and the fourth side wall 543 are formed in the shape of inclined steps. Furthermore, also in the dimension of the step of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to abut the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. Therefore, although it is formed with a certain large step, the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  The side walls 540 to 543 described above are formed to have depth widths d1, d2, d3 and d4, respectively, as shown in FIG. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4 and in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, the third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 Rear projecting portions of various game devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the peripheral back surface of the game board 4. A rear side wall for accommodating a rear projection of the gaming apparatus provided parallel to the first side wall 540 and extending parallel to the first side wall 540 rearwardly from the first side wall 540 with a step portion contacting the rear side wall; It is what constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the amounts of backward projection of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper surface on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed to be substantially at the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir portion 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thus, the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, the game Even in the case where a game apparatus in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4 is attached, the rearward projecting portion of such a game apparatus can be accommodated easily.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, the rear side wall 544 is open side on the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (pivot side) of the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 An upper rear surface wall 545 and an axially supported rear surface wall 546 as a rear surface wall are provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The front surface of the axially supported rear surface wall 546 is flat (see FIG. 67), and a ball passage unit 770 and a prize ball unit 800, which constitute a ball discharging mechanism, are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is supposed to be Therefore, it is sufficient for the inward projecting width dimension of the axially supported rear face wall 546 to have a width for attaching the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800.

  Further, the upper rear surface wall 545 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740 to be described later is attached to the rear surface, so the lower end side is formed in an inclined shape. Therefore, the width of the upper rear wall 545 to the inside is sufficient if it has the height width of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Further, the open side rear surface wall 544 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a rear surface supporting cylindrical support 575 for supporting a cover 1250 described later. Therefore, it is sufficient for the inward protrusion width dimension of the open side rear surface wall 544 to have a width dimension that forms the cover body support cylindrical portion 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open side rear surface wall 544, the upper rear surface wall 545, and the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 protruding inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4 Since the size of the space formed by 543 is secured, for example, even when a game apparatus is attached in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the game board 4, such a game apparatus The rear projecting portion can be stored easily. The inner side of the open side rear surface wall 544, the upper rear surface wall 545, and the pivotal support rear surface wall 546 is a rear surface opening 580, and the rear surface opening 580 is openably closed by a cover 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 penetrates on the flat portion on the open side. Locking holes 548 (in FIG. 68) in which three middle lower positions are opened, and locking projections 1004 of the locking device 1000 described later are engaged with the upper, middle, and lower portions of the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Also, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, but a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for screwing the attachment is at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper and middle. In addition, the attachment by the screw of the lock device 1000 is not only the upper part and the middle, but also the screw attachment portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 to be described later and the lock attachment hole 547 formed in the upper vicinity And the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, when the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 on the left and right of the upper front of the first side wall 540, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and A guide arc projection 552 to be in contact is provided in a protruding manner, and a relief recess 551 communicating with a notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 described later is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed in a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the attachment collar 733 of the award ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the award ball tank 720 communicates with the relief recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the ball stored in is increased, it functions so that it does not depress and ball clogging occurs. Further, when the award ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear end wall of the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the fourth side wall 543 substantially match when viewed from the front side of the award ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4) See). The above-mentioned guide arc projection 552 lifts the main frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2, and the lower side of the main frame 3 and the decorative cover plate A clearance is formed between them and 15 to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting an unauthorized device from the clearance.

  Further, a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 is formed on the upper rear surface wall 545 described above along the opening edge of the rear surface opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall A rail locking groove 554 is formed in a bent portion 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking projections 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 in these rail locking grooves 553, 554. Further, a rail hooking elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper portion of the upper rear surface wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. When the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the projecting pieces 749 and 750, the rail hooking elastic piece 555 is at the downstream upper end of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact from above.

  When removing the tank rail member 740, the rail hook elastic piece 555 is pushed backward, and then the tank rail member is released to release the locked state of the rail locking grooves 553, 554 and the locking projections 749, 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is bored on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 555, and an earth wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 etc.) is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 555. The relief hole 556 is drilled to release the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is formed inside the tank rail member 740. While being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wire connected to a grounding connector provided on the power supply substrate 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 70, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the pivoting side rear face wall 546, and the ball passage unit is interposed between the standing walls 560. 770 and the award ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guiding protrusion 561 is provided in a bent shape so as to extend slightly from the uppermost stream portion between the left and right standing walls 560 to a position slightly above the midstream portion. When the ball passage unit 770 described later is attached, the award ball guide projection 561 is projected backward on the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 so that the projecting height thereof gradually decreases toward the downstream side. , And corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770, and guides the winning balls in a row. In addition, a passage unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball passage unit 770 with a screw and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are protruded on the left and right of the award ball guiding projection 561 and a ball cutting switch described later A switch corresponding protrusion 563 is provided to face 778 (see FIG. 104). The passage unit attachment boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion which engages with a hook-like engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as an engagement portion of the award ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560. , And a lock elastic claw 564 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800, and the rotation shaft 808 (FIG. 106) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800. A relief hole 566 is formed in which the end of the reference is received. Further, a relief motor relief opening 572 is formed below the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the winning ball unit 800 faces the relief motor relief opening 572. (See FIG. 71). The prize ball unit 800 locks the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed on the lowermost end of the back surface wall 546 on the back side, and is supported by the engagement projection 565 and the elastic claw 564 for locking on the back side. It is designed to be removably attached to the face wall 546. The detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  Further, a cover contact groove 567 into which the open end of the cover 1250 is formed is formed at the open end of the axially supported rear face wall 546, and the lower end of the cover contact groove 567 is formed. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body contact groove 567 is formed with a stop hole 568 corresponding to the stop hole 1253 (see FIGS. 74 and 139) of the cover body 1250. The rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover 1250 by fastening with a screw. Further, a U-shaped locking protrusion 570 is projected from the locking wall 569, and the locking protrusion 570 is attached to the cover 1250 with the cover 1250 closed with respect to the main frame 3. By opening the formed through hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and locking a lock such as a padlock to the locking projection 570, only the person in charge having the key of the padlock opens the cover body 1250. You can make it impossible.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 has been demonstrated, when the door frame 5 is closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engaging grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 67) are formed in which the door frame projecting pieces 110d and 110e (see FIG. 25) bent with the lower side of the door frame base main body 110 directed backward are inserted. There is. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the above-described launcher attachment portion 520, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the pivotal support side. The door frame protrusion 110 d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 is provided so as to project rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110 e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, at the lower part of the open end, a door frame protrusion 110d having a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed. The above-described door frame protrusions 110d and 110e and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 form an outer protrusion and an engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the firing rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the firing device mounting portion 520 are formed to protrude, but the firing device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 The arrangement positions of the plate portion 511 are deviated to the open side, and further, they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. Therefore, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, the area from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are disposed to the open side is the back surface of the door frame 5 and the launcher attachment portion Since 520 and the front surface of the firing rail 515 are in close contact with each other, the incorrect material such as the piano wire which has slipped through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engaging groove 585 as described above It is extremely difficult to further slip through the space between the launcher attachment portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 to reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, the door frame 5 is closed because there is no portion projecting from the surface of the plate portion 511 in the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher attachment portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not disposed The space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an incorrect tool such as a piano wire which has slipped through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 584 described above easily simplifies the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. Since the mounting table 160 attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the door frame 5 does not allow the incorrect tool to pass upward through the space 586, the space 586 is closed with the door frame 5 closed. The crime prevention protrusion 166 which intrudes into is formed. The crime prevention projection 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from approximately the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the pivoting side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention projection piece 166 provided to the mounting stand 160 in a projecting manner. Then, the crime prevention projection 166 and the crime prevention space 586 constitute an inner protrusion and an engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the body frame 3.

  As described above, the main unit frame 3 has the game board 4, the hit ball launcher 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, the substrate unit A cover 1100 and a cover 1250 are attached, which will be sequentially described below.

[1-3A. Schematic configuration of the game board]
The schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 89. FIG. 76 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board 4, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4 80 is a magnified perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4 FIG. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view of the front component in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder, cut in the longitudinal direction in an assembled state, and FIG. 83 is a front component mainly constituting the game board. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 as viewed obliquely from the rear, with the game panel, the panel holder, and the like disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing the main control board box fixed to the board substrate holder, as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 85 disassembled into a board substrate holder, a drawer holder, and a main control board box and viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 87 is a schematic view of a disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. Further, FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board viewed through the game window.

  As shown in the figure, the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment includes a transparent plate-shaped gaming panel 600, a panel holder 630 that holds the gaming panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and the gaming panel 600 via the panel holder 630. It comprises a front component 601 attached to the front and a function display unit 640 fixed to the front component 601, and the rear end of the game area 605 is sectioned by the game panel 600. .

  On the surface of the game panel 600, various game devices and a large number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. Then, the front component 601 is attached to the front of the panel holder 630 after the game apparatus and the obstacle nail are provided, but the front component 601 has a circular hollow inside so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 605 And the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and the arc surface from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side passing the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602, the outer rail An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of the end portion 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow preventing member 604 of the stopper 620 on the upper side is provided. The outer rail 602 is obliquely formed with a connecting passage portion 609 which is connected to a rail connecting member 516 which is provided at the beginning end portion of the firing rail 515 as an extension of the firing rail 515 and adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609 610 is formed. A metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the far port 610 to the stopper 620.

  In addition, when the hitting ball which vigorously slides the outer rail 602 collides, the stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so as to repel the hitting ball to the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the batted ball that has been fired at one end and taken into the game area 605 from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a crime prevention projection 608 is provided on one side of the lower part of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The crime prevention projection 608 overlaps in the vertical direction with the crime prevention rear end projection 475 projected on the crime prevention cover 470 as described above in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, and the shaft of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 It is intended to prevent the entry of unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap on the support side.

  In the middle of the lower part of the inner rail 603, an out port 606 is provided, and between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow preventing member 604, the shot hit is up to the game area 605 A hitting ball which constitutes an induced guiding path but is returned to the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the far port 610 and guided to the far ball entrance 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. The tray unit 300 is again discharged into the tray unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. Further, a rail crime prevention groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the blocking portion 620. The rail crime prevention groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the crime prevention protrusion 474 which is provided on the crime prevention cover 470 as described above in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed enters. Improper engagement of the piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap on the open side of the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 overlapping in the vertical direction due to the concavo-convex engagement of the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the crime prevention post 474 Finally, it prevents the entry of tools.

  By the way, on one side of the game board 4, a positioning recess 611 fitted to the board positioning projection 576 formed on the main body frame 3 is formed, and on the other side of the game board 4, the board formed on the main body frame 3 A game board stopper 614 inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The game board stopper 614 is configured such that the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. In order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the positioning recess 611 is inserted obliquely from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning projection 576. The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main frame 3, and the game board stopper 614 which is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and its end is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed . Thereafter, the game board fixture 519 is rotated to fix the lower front of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main unit frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, it may be removed in the reverse procedure of the above procedure.

  Moreover, the game board 4 in this embodiment has a structure which prevents the unauthorized removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 very easily. That is, as shown in FIG. 76 and FIG. 80, at the lower end opposite to the passage notch portion 613 below the game board 4, an attachment notch 616 penetrating the front and back of the game board 4 is formed A mounting notch 616 is formed in the front component member 601.) A fastening bar 617 is horizontally fixed in the lower part of the mounting notch 616 in a horizontal direction. In the fastening bar 617, a band groove-like fastening portion 618 is formed substantially at the center of the fastening bar 617. On the other hand, as the detachment preventing mechanism provided on the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board placing portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3. A fastening hole 534 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper side of the part, and a fastening link 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 is extended (FIG. reference).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recessed portion 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board mounting portion 512 as shown in FIG. While being in the state, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening link 534 are in the same state. Then, with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening rod 534 are in agreement, the tip of the fastening band 619 generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch portion 616 And lead downward into the fastening hole 533 and lead it forward so that its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. Then, an unnecessary tip portion protruding forward from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut off. In this way, as long as the fastening band 619 is not cut, the game board 4 can not be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the fixing of the game board fastener 614 and the game board fixture 519 etc. is released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using the fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, the game It can be easily understood that the panel 4 has been removed and any fraud has been performed. Such an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism can prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main frame 3.

  In addition, the outer shape of the game board 4 is formed with notches 612 on the upper left and right sides, and a part of the front guiding passage 920 of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted obliquely below the side of the far port 610. A passage notch 613 is formed. In addition, on the lower left and right of the front component 601, there is provided a sticker sheet sticking section 615 for sticking a certificate sheet for proof confirmation. Further, a function indication seal 649 is attached to the upper side of the lower right sticker sheet attaching portion 615 in the front component member 601.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the game board 4, balls played in various game devices provided in the game area 605 (for example, general winning opening 2104, starting opening 2101, 2102, large winning opening 2103 etc., see FIG. 148 etc.) Control for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 6 and the like) as a display device disposed substantially at the center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 that can align and guide to the downstream side. A peripheral substrate box 622 in which the substrate 4150 and the peripheral control substrate 4140 are housed is attached.

  Further, on the back surface of the game board 4, a board substrate holder 623 for board is fixed below the back box 621. The board substrate holder 623 has a space (a width in the front-rear direction is relatively wider than the width of the back box 621 so that the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 are collected in front of the board substrate holder 623. Is formed, and a drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom of the space. The drop port 629 merges at a rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in a substrate unit 1100 described later.

  The board substrate holder 623 also has a main control board box 624 containing a main control board 4100 for controlling the game operation on its back side, a payout control board 1186 and a power board 1136 provided on the board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal plate 625 for connection is attached. The relay terminal board 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 which are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the substrate unit 1100 simply by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3.

  Further, the board substrate holder 623 for a panel is formed with a bonding guide protrusion 628 which protrudes rearward from the space between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The bonding guide projections 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the substrate unit 1100 side and the game board 4 side when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 as described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the bonding guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be connected naturally (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Front component, game panel, panel holder, panel back plate]
Subsequently, the holding structure of the gaming panel 600 in the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. As shown in the figure, the gaming board 4 is a frame made of a plate-like game panel 600 made of a transparent synthetic resin of a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin for holding the game panel 600 detachably from the front. Panel holder 630, and a front component provided with an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 disposed on the front side of the panel holder 630 to partition and form the outer periphery of the game area 605 and guide the game balls into the game area 605 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630.

  As shown, the front component 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601 a and positioning projections 601 b that project rearward on the rear surface side. The positioning bosses 601a and the positioning projections 601b can be positioned with the panel holder 630, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 600 which are disposed on the rear side, which will be described in detail later.

  The outer shape of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 is a polygonal shape slightly larger than the game area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, etc. . The thickness of the game panel 600 is thinner than that of the panel holder 630, and is set to a minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) which can be sufficiently held even if a fault nail (not shown) is planted.

  In this game panel 600, there are a plurality of fitting holes 600a arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 600b arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrating in the front-rear direction Each one is provided. The fitting holes 600 a and the long holes 600 b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with the panel holder 630. Further, the game panel 600 is provided with stepped engagement steps 600c which are recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step 600c is formed by cutting out approximately half of the thickness of the game panel 600, and is disposed outside the game area 605, similarly to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b, It is for engaging and fixing the game panel 600 to the panel holder 630.

  In addition, the gaming panel 600 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 601b projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 603 to the inner rail fixing hole 600d.

  Furthermore, in the game panel 600, a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed so as to be provided with a center character 2400, an attacker unit 2100 (see FIG. 148 etc.) and the like. Fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions. These openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery in the vertical and horizontal directions of the game panel 600, and since the outer periphery of the game panel 600 is connected, the strength of the game panel 600 is obtained by the openings 600e. To prevent the

  The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size including the game panel 600 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 of the first embodiment (in this example And about 20 mm). In the panel holder 630, a holding stepped portion 630a detachably holding the game panel 600 and recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the back and forth in approximately the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding stepped portion 630a. It mainly includes a through hole 630b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 has a depth from the front surface substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 600, and the front surface of the game panel 600 held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It becomes almost the same plane as. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 630a has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the gaming panel 600. By this clearance C, even if the game panel 600 is relatively expanded or contracted due to a temperature change or a temporal change, the expansion or contraction can be absorbed. The clearance C may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b formed in the game panel 600 held by the holding step portion 630a, from the front of the holding step portion 630a toward the front. It has a plurality of projecting pins 630c which can be extended and fitted and inserted into the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b of the game panel 600. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 630 c into the fitting holes 600 a and the long holes 600 b of the game panel 600, the panel holder 630 and the game panel 600 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engagement claw 630d and an engagement piece 630e which are engaged with the engagement step 600c at a position corresponding to the engagement step 600c of the game panel 600. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, the engaging claw 630d is disposed on the upper holding step 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the upper engaging step 600c in the gaming panel 600, and is held. It projects forward from the front surface of the portion 630a and is resiliently engaged with the engagement step 600c. The engagement claw 630 d is sized such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engaging piece 630e is disposed on the lower holding step 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engaging step 600c in the game panel 600, and is played between the front of the holding step 630a. In a state where a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted is formed, the engagement step portion 600c of the panel 600 is configured to extend along the front surface of the panel holder 630 toward the upper side (center side) by a predetermined amount. The game panel 600 is detachably held on the panel holder 630 by engaging the engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600 with the engagement claws 630d and the engagement piece 630e.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a boss insertion hole 630f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided on the front component member 601 can be inserted. In this boss insertion hole 630f, the positioning boss of the front component member 601 The panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned relative to each other by inserting 601 a.

  In the panel holder 630, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 84, a mounting support portion 630g having a form in which a predetermined amount is recessed in the front side so as to leave the lower side slightly lower than the center slightly below in the vertical direction Is equipped. With this mounting support portion 630g, the rear surface of the panel holder 630 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end above the predetermined range from the lower end to the rear peripheral side protruding backward, and the amount of depression ( Depth) is about 2.5 mm (in this example) which can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 78) of the back box 621 in the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 630g. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from projecting rearward beyond the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 can be pachinko machine 1 It can be installed and installed reliably in the game board installation recess 510 of

  Further, on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630, it is formed on the lower side of the position where the mounting support portion 630g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635 An accommodation recess 630h is further provided, and an engagement portion 630i which is disposed so as to penetrate in the accommodation recess 630h in the front-rear direction and can engage an engagement claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 630h releasably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by locking the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 to the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the accommodated panel back plate 635 is a panel It is formed to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 630.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j which are disposed in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. It is arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be attached and fixed using the mounting hole 630j (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure, projecting forward from a fixing portion 621a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 621). Is omitted)) is inserted. In the present example, the positioning hole 630k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in a rear view.

  An attachment hole of an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be attached and fixed so that the inner diameter of the hole is a mixture of a large diameter and a small diameter with respect to the attachment hole 630j. 630 j may be used.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 630l that open to the rear side in at least a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 630 is reduced by the lightening portions 630l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these lightening portions 630l are not formed in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 630 to the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within the range In the above, since the front surface of the panel holder 630 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component 601 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface. The launched game balls are smoothly guided. In addition, as illustrated, the panel holder 630 is formed with a lightening portion 630 l so that the mounting holes 630 j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 630 is maintained. The grid-like ribs are formed for the purpose of

  The panel holder 630 is provided with a positioning portion 630m corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and the game panel 600 is held by the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 630, an opening 630n communicating with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 630o communicating with the far port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 so as to cover the lightening portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height, and the rear surface of the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630 A plurality of screw holes 635a which can be accommodated so as to be substantially flush with each other and which are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the planar rear surface and which can screw predetermined screws can be arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. A positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a weight loss recess 635d that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front side are provided.

  The screw holes 635a and the positioning holes 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting holes 630j and the positioning holes 630k in the panel holder 630. Further, in the panel back plate 635 as well as the panel holder 630, the portion where the screw holes 635a and the positioning holes 635b and the like are formed is formed into a boss shape by the recessed portion 635d and supports them or the panel back plate In order to maintain the strength of 635, grid-like ribs are formed. Furthermore, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 630n of the panel holder 630, the communication hole 630o, and the boss insertion hole 630f.

  The panel back plate 635 is integrated with the panel holder 630 by being accommodated in the accommodation recess 630 h of the panel holder 630 and by locking the locking claw 635 c of the panel back plate 635 to the locking portion 630 i of the panel holder 630. In that state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this manner, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged in a predetermined array on the entire outer periphery of the through hole 630b on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630. Mounting holes such as 635a and the like and positioning holes 630k and 635b are disposed, and by the presence of these mounting holes, a predetermined member can be mounted and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the present example, the game panel 600 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630 a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claw 630 d and the engaging piece 630 e By engaging the engagement step 600c, the game panel 600 can be held by the panel holder 630, and the front side of the game panel 600 and the front surface of the panel holder 630 become substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set in the conventional obstacle nail planting device in the state where the game panel 600 is held in the panel holder 630 without remodeling the obstacle nail planting device used more It is possible to suppress such cost increase.

  In addition, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600, the panel holder 630, and the front component 601, the position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. varies The changing game panel 600 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 can be used as a common part, and the panel holder 630, the front component 601, etc. can be made recyclable. The pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 4 capable of supporting various types of machines can be realized only by exchanging only one.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of mounting holes 630j are provided in advance in the panel holder 630 in a predetermined arrangement, various types of back unit 2000, board substrate holder 623 for a panel, etc., which are attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630 The panel holder 630 is common to the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 630j even if the mounting and fixing positions of predetermined members are different. It can be made into parts.

  In the present embodiment, as the game panel 600 for partitioning the rear end of the game area 605, the one held by the panel holder 630 is shown, but the panel holder 630 is eliminated and the veneer having substantially the same outer shape as the panel holder 630 It is good also as a game panel (conventional game panel) formed with wooden plywood, such as a board.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and FIG. The board substrate holder 623 for a panel is attached and fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600 or the panel holder 630, and as shown in the figure, it is in the form of a box whose front and top are open It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the front side in the approximate center, and after receiving the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 600, it can be discharged downward from the approximate center in the horizontal direction ing. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting a main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 623 for the panel, and on the side (right side in rear view) of the main control board box mounting portion 623a. A sealed portion 623 b corresponding to the sealing portion 624 a provided in the main control substrate box 624 is formed. In addition, a drawer holder 636 for supporting the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623 for panel.

  The main control board box 624 in this example is supported by the main control board box attachment portion 623a on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is the main control board box attachment portion 623a. It seals to the side sealed part 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board holder 623 for panel in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box attachment portion 623a. It is possible to visually determine whether or not it has been removed illegally.

[1-3A-3. Function Display Unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display substrate 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, this function display board 640a includes segment displays SEG1 and SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. The first special symbol display 641 is assigned to the segment display SEG1, and the second special to the segment SEG2. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and figures etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and figures etc as a special symbol, the first start of the attacker unit 2100 described later will be described. When the game ball wins in the mouth 2101, the segment display SEG1 changes and displays a predetermined special symbol, and when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 2102, the segment display SEG2 changes and displays a predetermined special symbol. It has become.

  In addition, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is assigned to LED1, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is assigned to LED2, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is for LED3, and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is for LED4. Each is assigned. When the game ball that has won the first starting opening 2101 is not used in the variation display of the special symbol, the first special symbol memory display 643 lights up or blinks with the number of balls of the game ball won as the hold number. There is. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a lights up and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is extinguished, and when the holding ball is two balls, the first special symbol memory The indicator 643 lights together, and the first special symbol memory lamp 643a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b lights when the holding ball is three balls, and the first special symbol memory display when the holding ball is four balls The devices 643 both blink. On the other hand, when the game ball which has won the second starting opening 2102 is not used in the variation display of the special symbol, the second special symbol memory display 644 lights up or blinks with the number of balls of the game ball which wins as the hold number. It has become. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is extinguished, and when the holding ball is two balls, the second special symbol memory is The indicator 644 lights together, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a blinks when the holding ball is 3 balls, the second special symbol memory lamp 644b lights, and the second special symbol memory display when the holding balls are 4 balls Both the lamps 644 blink.

  Furthermore, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED that can turn on red / green / orange, and can also be turned on in combination of these red / green / orange. When the game ball passes through a gate 2302, which will be described later, the LED 5 displays a predetermined normal symbol in a variable manner by displaying the lighted color as a normal symbol.

  Also, a symbol storage indicator 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9 respectively. When the game ball which has passed the gate 2201 is not used in the variable display of the normal symbol (when the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed by the normal symbol display 645 and when the movable piece 2105 is opened and closed) The normal symbol storage indicator 646 lights up with the number of balls of the passing game ball as the hold number for the game ball not immediately used for the variable display of the normal symbol immediately after passing 2302. Specifically, when the holding ball is one ball, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are extinguished, and when the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. Normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are extinguished, and when the holding balls are three balls, normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are lit and normal symbol memory lamps 646b are extinguished, and when the holding balls are four spheres, normal symbol memory display All 646 lights up.

  Also, a game state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED that can turn on red / green / orange, and can also be turned on in combination of these red / green / orange. The LED 10 is configured to notify that the game state is in probability fluctuation or a small hit by displaying the lighted color as the game state.

  Furthermore, a 2-round indicator lamp 648 a is assigned to the LED 11 and a 15-round indicator lamp 648 b is assigned to the LED 12. As described above, the two-round display lamp 648a lights up to notify that the number of times the big winning opening 2103 is opened from the closed state (round) is two times, while displaying the fifteenth round The lamp 648b lights to notify that the round is 15 times.

  Thus, the segment displays SEG1 and SEG2, and the LEDs 1 to 12 mounted on the function display substrate 640a are the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, A second special symbol memory indicator 644, an ordinary symbol indicator 645, an ordinary symbol memory indicator 646, a game state indicator 647, and a round indicator 648 are respectively assigned to display various functions, segment indicator SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, the second special symbol memory indicator 644, the ordinary symbol indicator 645, the ordinary symbol memory The display 646, the game state display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. That.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol memory display 643, the second special symbol memory display 644, in order to variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, respectively, Alphanumeric characters and figures are displayed using the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the normal symbol indicator 645, the ordinary symbol memory indicator 646, the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648, and different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned thereto Etc. are displayed as a special symbol.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol storage indicator 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and LEDs 12 assigned to the round indicator 648 is a fixed value 6.

  The function display substrate 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with a screw (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back of the front component 601 of the game board 4 with a screw (not shown). In the front component member 601, segment display openings 601c are formed at positions corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display substrate 640a, and the contents displayed by these segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 87, in the front component member 601, the LED insertion holes 601d are provided at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display substrate 640a, and the cover member 640b is a front component member 601. The LED 1 to the LED 12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when mounted on the back surface of the disc. The LED insertion holes 601 d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that lights lit or blinked of the LEDs 1 to 12 are not mistaken as lights lit or blinked of the adjacent LEDs. The contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by lighting or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display sticker attaching part 601 e for attaching the function display sticker 649. In addition, the recessed part 601f is formed in the function display seal sticking part 601e. A tool such as a minus driver is inserted into the recess 601f to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649 pasted. Here, it is conceivable to provide a projection on the function display seal 649 in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649, but when opening and closing the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3, the projection is pulled for some reason As a result, the function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker sticking part 601e. So, in this embodiment, when opening and closing the door frame 5 from the main body frame 3 by forming the recessed part 601f in the function display seal sticking part 601e, the function display seal 649 is prevented from peeling off from the function display seal sticking part 601e. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function Display Sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display stickers 649 in the gaming machine 4 are printed by grouping them into groups Grp1 to Grp3 every function display on the surface thereof, and in the non-play area of the game board 4 It is stuck on a function indication seal sticking section 601e formed on a certain front component member 601.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 is composed of a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol memory display 643, and these first special symbol display 641 and first special symbol memory display It is divided in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1 which can visually recognize 643 and is printed on the function display seal 649. The first special symbol display 641, the first special symbol memory so that the area surrounded by the solid line SL1 can be visually recognized as the display by the first special symbol display 641 or the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various types of information related to the variable display of the special symbol by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 are displayed. For example, when the first start opening 2101 is start-up winning, the first special symbol display 641 changes and displays a predetermined special symbol, or the first special symbol memory display 643 takes the number of balls of the winning game balls as the hold number. It lights up or blinks. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory display 643 can be obtained. It is possible to convey to the player that is indicating various information related to the variation display of the special symbol by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101. Thereby, the player changes the special symbol by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 by visually observing the group Grp1 which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1 and printed on the function display sticker 649. Various information on the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 is composed of a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol memory indicator 644. These second special symbol indicator 642 and second special symbol memory It is divided in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2 which makes the display 644 visible and is printed on the function display seal 649. The second special symbol display 642, second special symbol memory so that the area surrounded by the solid line SL2 can be visually recognized as display by the second special symbol display 642 or lighting or blinking by the second special symbol memory display 644. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various types of information regarding the display of the variation of the special symbol by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 are displayed. For example, when the game ball wins the start to the second start opening 2102, the second special symbol display 642 changes and displays a predetermined special symbol, or the second special symbol memory display with the number of balls of the winning game ball as the hold number The lamp 644 lights up or blinks. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol memory indicator 644 into one group Grp2, these second special symbol indicator 642 and the second special symbol memory indicator 644 It is possible to convey to the player that is indicating various information related to the variable display of the special symbol by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102. As a result, the player changes the display of the special symbol by winning a game ball to the second starting opening 2102 by visually observing the group Grp2 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649. It is possible to easily confirm various information on

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 is composed of an ordinary symbol display 645 and an ordinary symbol storage indicator 646, and a solid line SL3 for visualizing the ordinary symbol indicator 645 and the ordinary symbol storage indicator 646. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. The area surrounded by the solid line SL3 has a transparent position corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage indicator 646 so that lighting by the normal symbol indicator 645 and lighting by the normal symbol storage indicator 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 variably displays the presence / absence of opening / closing of the movable piece 2105 as a predetermined normal symbol, and when the movable piece 2105 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the gaming ball goes to the second starting opening 2102 It becomes easy to win a prize. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes the first special symbol display 641, the first special symbol memory display 643, the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol memory display 644, and the ordinary symbol memory display Stars are printed to distinguish them from the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648. In the group Grp3, various information on the gate 2302 can also be displayed. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 2302, the normal symbol display 645 variably displays a predetermined normal symbol, or the normal symbol storage display 646 lights up with the number of balls of the passed game ball as the hold number. In this manner, by grouping the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage indicator 646 into one group Grp3, various types of the normal symbol indicator 645 and the ordinary symbol storage indicator 646 related to the variation display of the normal symbol are displayed. The player can be informed that information is being shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information related to the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in the state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 88, in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 in which the gaming state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized at positions corresponding to the gaming state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648, respectively. It is divided and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that lighting by the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized. In order to make it easy to understand the maximum number of rounds on the round indicator 648, the value 2 which is the maximum number of rounds is printed at the position corresponding to the 2 round display lamp 648a, and the position corresponding to the 15 round display lamp 648b The value 15 is printed, which is the maximum number of rounds. As described above, the gaming state indicator 647 indicates that the gaming state is a probability fluctuation or a small hit by displaying the color to be lit as the gaming state, and the 2-round display lamp 648 a has a special winning opening 2103. The indication that the number of times (round) from the closed state to the open state (round) is 2 is turned on and notified, and the 15-round display lamp 648b is turned on and informed that the round is 15 times. As a result, the player can easily check the gaming state by visually observing the gaming state indicator 647 which is partitioned in the state surrounded by the solid line SL4 and printed on the function display sticker 649, as indicated by the solid line SL5. It can be easily confirmed whether the maximum number of rounds is 2 times or not by visually observing the 2-round indication lamp 648a which is partitioned in the enclosed state and printed on the function indication sticker 649. By visually observing the fifteen-round indicator lamp 648b which is partitioned in the enclosed state and printed on the function indicator sticker 649, it can be easily confirmed whether the maximum number of rounds is fifteen or not.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are partitioned in a state surrounded by solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649, and the gaming state indicator 647, the round indicator The position corresponding to 648 is divided and printed in a state of being surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 which the game state indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can visually recognize.

  Thus, in the function display seal 649, the functions of the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display substrate 640a shown in FIG. 87, are grouped as in the groups Grp1 to Grp3, etc. The content is printed and partitioned. In addition, even if a star is printed on the normal symbol display 645, etc. and the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2 and LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are It is easy to understand.

  The correspondence between the function and the printed content is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a seal management number 649a, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the seal management number 649a is printed at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize from the game window 101 via the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey information that is not necessary to the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the recess 601f provided in the function display sticker attaching portion 601e is also formed at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the recess 601f.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is for preventing an operation error in which a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 erroneously attaches a function indication seal of another specification when assembling the pachinko machine 1. The seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and the modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are linked to the seal management number 649a and managed. Thus, when the seal management number 649a is checked, the stock of the function display stickers 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, recent pachinko machines have been shortened in their development period as their life cycles have been shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp and a 15-round display lamp are displayed to notify that the number of times the big winning opening is opened from the closed state (round) is 2 times and 15 times. In addition, in the case of adding a 5-round indicator lamp or an 8-round indicator lamp to notify that the number of rounds is 5 times and 8 times, pachinko by reducing the number of starting openings from two to one etc. The specification change of the machine 1 can be coped with by using the common function display substrate 640a. In order to change the contents to be printed on the function display sticker with the specification change of the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the functions of the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and LED1 to LED12 described above and the contents printed on the function display seal The correspondence relationship of is printed on the function indication seal as a seal management number. Thus, for example, at the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, before the worker of the line affixes the function display seal 649 to the game board 4, whether the specification of the pachinko machine 1 corresponds to the function display seal 649 or not It can confirm by visually observing seal management number 649a, and it can prevent that the function display seal 649 which does not correspond to the specification of the pachinko machine 1 is stuck. The function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to the improvement of productivity.

[1-3 B. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. FIG. 90 is a perspective view (A) of the entire hitting and launching apparatus 650 and a perspective view (B) of a state in which the firing motor portion is removed, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting and launching apparatus 650. FIG. 93 is a front view (A) showing the relationship between the ball hitting and launching device 650 and the firing rail 515, and a perspective view (B) of the firing motor portion. FIG. 93 is a ball hitting and firing in the state where the operation handle portion 410 is not operated. FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the launch rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking launcher 650 and the launch rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is operated. 95 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) seen from the front, and an AA sectional view (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the hitting and firing apparatus 650 It is.

  The hitting and launching apparatus 650 pivotally supports the hitting bowl 687 rotatably on the firing base frame 651, and mounts on the firing base frame 651 a firing motor 695 for giving a reciprocating rotation to the hitting bowl 687. The projection base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 for adjusting the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 for applying a biasing force to return to the above.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the firing base frame 651 is formed of a synthetic resin into a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the bearing 689 of the hitting ball 687 is fitted substantially at the center thereof A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed on the upper side and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball 687 when the hitting ball 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. Also, a slide guide hole 655 in the form of a long narrow groove is formed above the rear of the firing base frame 651 (opposite the part corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and the slide member storage space is below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is for guiding a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding on the rear end upper portion of the slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is a guide bush 681 fixed to a lock hole 662 formed on the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682 in a guide long hole 680 formed on the front of the slide rod 677 By penetrating the Further, as shown in FIG. 92, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656.

  In the front part of the upper side of the firing base frame 651, a flange is formed with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an operation piece opening 657 is formed in the flange above the bearing cylinder 652. There is. The weight 173 of the ball feed member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the striking ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 in the operation piece opening 657. The actuating piece 658 which abuts on the mounting portion 660 which is provided on the rear upper part of the opening edge of the actuating piece opening 657 is pivotably provided by a locking pin 659. The actuating piece 658 is formed in a "字" shape, and the base plate of the rear end of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by the stop pin 659 and pivots integrally with the hitting ball 687 in the arc portion below from the pivotal support portion. The upper side portion swings the ball feed member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocation of the hitting ball 687 while in contact with the actuating piece contact portion 693 protruding from the 690, and the swinging motion of the ball feed member 172 strikes the ball supply port. The hitting balls flowing out of 171 b are supplied one by one to the launching position of the launching rail 515.

  Furthermore, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 incorporating the firing motor 695 to the firing base frame 651 are projected at a total of three locations, two at the lower rear and one at the upper front. And a boss 663 for a rocking piece into which the shaft hole 673 of the lower end of the rocking piece 672 connected with the slide member 710 is slid to slide the slide rod 677 rearward of the lower portion of the slide member storage space 656. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the metal plate 665 is in close contact with the shot base launcher 650 in order to increase the rigidity thereof. Therefore, through holes 666, 667, 668, 669, corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the rocking piece boss 663 in the metal plate 665. 671 is formed, and a laterally elongated elliptical through hole 670 through which the connection convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also penetrated. After the metal plate 665 configured as described above stores the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656, the through holes 666 to 671 correspond to the members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663 corresponding thereto. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by closely fitting and screwing the firing base frame 651 in a penetrating or matching manner.

  The tip end portion of the rocking piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached has a head extending from the through hole 671. The shaft hole 673 of the rocking piece 672 is inserted through the head portion. The swinging piece 672 is swingably supported around the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the swinging piece 672 is formed in the shape of a vertically long wedge, the shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the slightly long hole shape in which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle Connection holes 674 are formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 which abuts on one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Then, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663, and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with a washer The swinging piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The mounted swinging piece 672 is configured such that the upper portion thereof swings around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Also, on the upper front surface of the metal plate 665, a horizontally elongated slide rod 677 is slidably mounted in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 protruding from the rear upper portion of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665 and the guide long hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is penetrated to fix the set screw 682 in the set hole 662. The slide rod 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is provided at one end (rear end) thereof with an abutted portion 679 which abuts on the abutment portion 675 of the swinging piece 672 described above, and the other end (front end) is one end of the biasing spring 684 A spring locking portion 683 is provided in a protruding manner for locking the locking wheel 685.

  Although the bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, the bearing 689 of the hitting ball 687 is fitted to the bearing cylinder 652 so as not to come off. The lower end portion of the ball striking rod 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and at the same time the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with a working piece abutting portion 693 which abuts on the working piece 658 on the front and back side, and a spring for holding the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on its front side. A locking portion 692 is provided in a protruding manner, and a motor contact protrusion 691 which is engaged with and disengaged from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is provided in a protruding manner on the front side in the rear. At the upper end of the striking ball stick 687, a synthetic resin bite 688 is fixed, and the firing position is formed by the lower end of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 fixed above it. I am about to rush into

  On the other hand, on the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651, the shooting motor 695 housed in the motor cover 694 is attached. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 has a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 inside, and the motor mounting boss 661 enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion. And a mounting portion in which a mounting fixing hole 699 for mounting is formed integrally with the reverse rotation preventing cam 698 and the motor cam 697 at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 formed integrally inside the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation preventing cam 698, and it engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) which is pivotably fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 to be a firing motor The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent the occurrence of a failure in which the ball striking device 650 can not be driven due to the motor cam 697 rotating in the reverse direction and the motor cam 697 and the motor contact protrusion 691 meshing with each other. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball-like shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball 687 while engaging and disengaging with the motor contact protrusion 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the main structure of the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 which is stored in the slide member storage space 656 and slides as described above is formed in a rectangular shape whose rear is open, and an elliptical convex portion 711 having an oval shape is protruded on the front surface thereof. In addition, a circular connection protrusion 712 is provided at the rear of the elliptical protrusion 711. Further, on the upper surface and the lower surface, slide contact projections 713 having a circular arc shape in cross section are provided so as to project at both ends so as to slide in the slide member storage space 656 easily. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided on the lower surface of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the near side of the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction, and protrudes slightly inward from the upper surface and the lower surface of the first inclined surface 715 A sandwiching piece 716 is formed, which has a predetermined distance between its tips. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 to be inclined in a V-shape in a side view toward the back. Thus, in the state where the slide projection 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end side of the slide projection 183 on the inclined side 183a abuts the side wall in the slide direction front. In the state, it is in a state of being inserted between the upper and lower holding pieces 716. Although the space 718 is formed on the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, the space 718 does not particularly function.

  In the state where slide member 710 configured as described above is stored in slide member storage space 656, as shown in FIG. 92A, an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of slide member storage space 656. While the insertion space 714 is formed to face the connection opening 664 of a shape, the slide member 710 is in contact with one space inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. It is illustrated as being in contact, but in the normal state it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship between the strength of the slide member 710 and the biasing spring 684 of the hitting and firing apparatus 650 will be described. The slide member 710 is at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (FIG. 92A). When in the position abutted against the inner wall of the space), as shown in FIG. 93, the swinging piece 672 connected to the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. Therefore, the slide rod 677 in contact with the swinging piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left direction in FIG. 93) by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swinging piece 672 The abutted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 abuts. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is not tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball 687 is weak even if the hitting ball 687 is reciprocated by the rotation of the firing motor 695, and the hitting ball in the firing position is elastic. Even if it is emitted, it does not reach the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position in the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves in the direction of the left space inner wall in FIG. 92A), as shown in FIG. Since the swinging piece 672 swings and tilts about the lower shaft hole 673, the contact between the contact portion 675 and the abutted portion 679 causes the slide rod 677 to move in the other direction (rightward in FIG. 94). Slide towards. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball 687 becomes stronger when the hitting ball 687 is reciprocated and rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, and the hitting ball in the firing position is It is strongly bombarded to reach the game area 605 of the game board 4. The strength of the resilience of the ball can be adjusted according to the amount of sliding of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the elastic force by the hitting and firing device 650. It is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 which moves in response to the turning operation of the movement operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, by rotating the pivoting operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, the cam 416 in the form of a fixed ball fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 also rotates. 182 slides in the interior of the joint unit mounting recess 110c in one direction. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 provided on the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. In a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 penetrates the connection opening 664 formed in the discharge device attachment portion 520 of the main body frame 5 to insert the slide member 710. It is to be inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side of the inclined side 183 a of the slide protrusion 183 is in contact with the side wall in the slide direction front and is inserted between the upper and lower sandwiching pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide projection 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides along with the slide movement of the slide member 710, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hitting ball of the hitting and firing device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the ball striking and firing device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the hit and fired device 650 cooperate with or separate from each other. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710 and the handle device 400 The slide projection 183 separates from the insertion space 714 and separates the handle device 400 and the hitting and firing device 650 by opening the door frame 5 to the body frame 3 in cooperation with the hitting and firing device 650. As the door frame 5 is opened and closed, cooperation and separation between the handle unit 400 and the ball striking and firing unit 650 can be performed extremely easily. In particular, when the slide projection 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projection 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 provided in the insertion space 714 is provided. The surface 717 allows the slide projection 183 to be smoothly inserted into the nipping position.

  Also, sometimes the player stuffs a stuffing into the pivoting operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fixes it at a position where it is pivoted to a certain extent, but the clerk of the game arcade does not know the stuff and the door frame May open and close 5 Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem since the slide projection 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide projection 183 The slide member is accompanied by the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the slide protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the slide member Finally, the slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are engaged while moving the 710 in one direction. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 is fixed at any rotation position, cooperation between the operation handle device 400 and the ball striking and launching device 650 can be performed. It is.

[1-3C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B) and a side view (C) of the award ball tank 720. FIG. As described above, the award ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the award ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the notch portion 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom thereof is the downstream side wall 723 from the upstream side wall 724. The reservoir portion 728 is formed of a first sloped bottom surface 726 sloped toward the and a second sloped bottom surface 727 sloped from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described next.

  Further, a discharge port 730 is formed at the lower end of the slope of the second sloped bottom surface 727, and the discharge port 730 protrudes outside the rear wall 722 of the award ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. It is formed to be surrounded by the outlet projecting wall 725 connecting the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 in a U-shape. In addition, mounting flanges 733 engaged with the tank mounting grooves 550 are formed on both ends outside of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, and the bottom of the prize ball tank 720 has the bottom face of the main body frame 3. Mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 protruding from the four side wall 543 are provided in a protruding manner, and a ball aligning member 744 described later is attached to the lower part of the rear wall 722 on the upstream side of the winning ball tank 720 A leveling mounting shaft 735 is provided in a protruding manner. Further, an overflow prevention member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the award ball tank 720 except the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting collar 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are mounted on the main body frame 3. The fourth side wall 543 is abutted. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is mounted on and attached to the upper surface of the back surface of the main body frame 3. In this mounted state, as shown in FIG. 74, storage is performed via the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 described next. ing. Therefore, in the award ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) storing balls is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. While being formed to be substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction to the fourth side wall 543, the fourth side wall 543 is placed on the upper side of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, as described above, since the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are formed deep so as to cover the rearward projecting space of the peripheral portion of the game board 4, the side wall 541 to Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper portion of the 543 is formed shallower than that of the conventional reservoir tank, the prize ball tank 720 is formed even if the prize balls are stored and the weight increases. Since the whole is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the balls stored can be smoothly led to the discharge port 730 without any deformation of the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727. In addition, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the award ball tank 720, the flow of the balls stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. Is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which the opening is provided in a part of the inclined bottom as in the prior art and used as the discharge port, the ball breaking protrusion for elimination of the ball clogging is formed in the reservoir near the discharge port. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging to occur.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 accommodating the rear projection of the gaming apparatus, and the prize Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 is provided so as to project outward beyond the rear wall 722 of the storage section, the tank rail member 740 is located outside the storage section of the prize ball tank 720 (when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 Side, and the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, so the rear projection of the gaming apparatus provided on the back of the game board 4 is accommodated. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected backward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, whereby the rear projection of the gaming apparatus is projected at the upper side of the game board 4 It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 accommodating the rear projection of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is of the prize ball tank 720. The configuration provided outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that the conventional prize ball tank does not have. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the balls at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the drawing, at normal times, the balls stored in the winning ball tank 720 are stored in the storage portion of the winning ball tank 720 and are in a stagnant state. In this case, when a part of the inclined bottom of the storage portion is opened to form the discharge port 730A as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. When the discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball breaking protrusion 736B, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the discharge ball 730A is formed with the discharge port 730A formed on the opposite side. In the portion 730B, the pressure of the stored ball and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure always cause the ball pressure to be applied to the discharge port 730A, 730B from four directions.

  For this reason, even if the pressure of the balls is balanced depending on the degree of polymerization of the balls, even if the ball on the downstream side flows out, the ball biting state may occur at the discharge ports 730A and 730B and ball clogging may occur. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere at the outlet 730 is a pressure from two directions, ie, an acting force from the reservoir toward the outlet 730 and its reaction, and it does not receive pressure from all directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the ball on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult for the ball biting state in the discharge port 730 to occur, and it is possible to achieve an excellent effect that no ball clogging occurs.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Subsequently, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the above-described award ball tank 720 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. 98 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 showing the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900. FIG. 100 is a perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 showing the relationship between a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail member 740, a ball passage unit 770, a prize ball unit 800, and a full tank unit 900. FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball | bowl passage unit 770. FIG.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear surface wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, on the tank rail member 740, a plurality of locking projections 749 to be inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 are protruded at the left and right sides and the lower side of the side surface on the rear surface side. At the center, a hook-shaped locking projection 750 which is latched from above on the rail locking groove 554 is provided in a protruding manner. Then, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined bowl shape whose upper surface is open, the upstream end upper surface of which faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the downstream end lower surface thereof is in the ball passage unit 770 described later in detail. I am facing. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 is a passage 742 through which the balls flow in two rows by dividing walls 741.

  A fine groove is cut off at the bottom of the passage 742 so that foreign matter rolling along the passage 742 with the ball drops downward from the fine groove. Also, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742 and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68) described above. ing. Therefore, the static electricity charged on the ball flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate via the grounding wire connector 557 and the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 1136 to the outside.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight is provided swingably on the slightly downstream side of the middle region of the tank rail member 740. The ball straightening member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball straightening attachment shaft 735 of the above-mentioned winning ball tank 720, and is directed toward the inside of the two rows of passages 742 in the tank rail member 740. The balls are suspended, and the balls flowing down the respective passages 742 rectify so as to become one stage when flowing down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 downstream of the installation position of the ball straightening member 744 is covered by a ball holding plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in a slanted arc shape so that the ball which has not been made into one step by the ball aligning member 744 is forcibly made into one step.

  Further, at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740, a pair of aligning gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 facing the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 such that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by half a pitch. Therefore, when the upper portions of the balls flowing down the respective passages 742 of the tank rail member 740 flow downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the balls of the two rows of the passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. It will be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the balls having flowed through the respective passages 742 are guided centrally along the inclined surface 743 formed at the lower part of the two rows of the passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gear 747, During the guidance, the balls from the two rows of passages 742 are alternately dropped in a line at the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described next. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arc-shaped gear cover 746 at its upper surface.

[1-3 E. Ball passage unit]
Next, a ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a row from the tank rail member 740 to the winning ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the award ball unit 800. It is a side view for explaining. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the gear ball 866, the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841, and the unit sub plate 825 are removed from the prize ball unit 800, and the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 is drawn in an easy-to-understand manner. It is. However, gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dashed lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the ball passage unit 770 of this example, a ball drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent on the back surface (a surface seen from the back surface is called the surface) of a substantially rectangular plate. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front and rear bending passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front and rear direction (the depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front and rear bending passage portion 772a. It comprises a left and right bent passage portion 772b bent in a direction (left and right as viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portion 772b and substantially vertical.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (A), since the position of the upper end inlet 773 which falls from the tank rail member 740 mentioned above is the approximate center of the two rows of the passages 742 as shown in FIG. Since the back side of the upper rear surface wall 545 of the frame 3 and the rear surface wall 546 on the support side is away from the front surface, the prize ball guide projections provided on the front and rear bent passage portion 772 a and the rear support wall s The ball drop passage 772 is bent in the front-rear direction so as to be close to the surface of the pivoting side rear face wall 546. In addition, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bending passage portion 772b is formed in a U-shape so as to fill the substantially horizontal width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the force of the ball which has dropped from the tank rail member 740. It is formed by bending.

  Furthermore, although the vertical passage portion 772c is also formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly gently curved, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bending passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c, and the notch portion A broken ball detection piece 776 whose upper end is pivotally supported by a support shaft 777 is attached pivotably at 775. A ball breakage switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball breakage detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball breakage switch 778 is in contact with the ball breakage detection piece 776. The broken ball detection unit 776 and the broken ball switch 778 constitute a broken ball detection mechanism for detecting broken balls in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball breakage detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and pushes the actuator 779 to turn on the ball breakage switch 778. Since the broken ball detection piece 776 swings toward the inside of the vertical passage portion 772c when the ball disappears in the portion 772c due to the ball clogging or the ball shortage, the actuator 779 turns the ball broken switch 778 OFF. When the out-of-ball switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 described later is stopped and the payout of the prize balls is stopped.

  A stopper projection 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 in order to prevent excessive swinging of the broken ball detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 is provided with a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogged insertion groove 781 is inserted into a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 when it is difficult for the ball crush detection piece 776 to swing due to a ball clog or the like, and the ball clog c To eliminate the problem of Furthermore, the other bending passage wall 771 facing the broken ball detection piece 776 is formed to bulge slightly toward the broken ball detection piece 776 side. This is for reliably pressing the broken ball detection piece 776 to turn on the broken ball switch 778 when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Further, in the ball passage unit 770, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed at a position avoiding the ball drop passage 772 described above. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574 formed on the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is a passage unit similarly formed on the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 It corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the locking hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while engaging the positioning boss 783 with the positioning pin 574 This can be done by screwing the screw 784 from the locking hole 782 in the state. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 engaging with the engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side thereof, and for connecting with the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the connection lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting like an arc on the back surface of a rectangular plate material, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 is formed. The projection shaft 789 as a rotation shaft portion which is provided to project from the end of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connection lid member 786 is fitted to the support projection 787 as the shaft support portion which is provided to project from the left and right ends Thus, it is pivotally supported pivotally. Further, the connecting lid member 786 is extended downward of the ball passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 is in communication with the downstream end of the ball falling passage 772 (FIG. 105B). The state shown) and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 does not communicate with the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 (the state shown in FIG. 105A) can be turned by opening. At the time of transition from the open state to the closed state, a guide projection 791 for guiding the support piece 788 of the connection lid member 786 is provided to project from the lower end portion of the rear surface of the ball passage unit 770.

  In a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the pivotally supported rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 and a state in which the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted to the pivotally rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105) In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed, and the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball are locked by locking the rear surface with the locking elastic claw 820 provided on the winning ball unit 800. A passage wall 790 communicates with the bending passage 803 of the unit 800 so that the ball falling in the ball falling passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bending passage 803 of the winning ball unit 800. The reason for providing the pivoting connection lid member 786 to the ball passage unit 770 in this way is that the prize ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as described later The space formed between the ball passage unit 770 and the winning ball unit 800 due to the attachment to the ball does not inhibit the smooth falling of the ball.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 provided in the ball passage unit 770, the pivotally supported rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 is provided so as to be gradually lowered toward the downstream side. By inserting the prize ball guiding projection 561, the upstream portion of the ball dropping passage 772 is back-faced so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball dropping passage 772 is located approximately at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front and rear bent passage portion 772a bent in the front and rear direction as seen from the figure. Thus, in a configuration in which the balls flowing downward in two rows are alternately sent one by one to the award ball unit 800 side by the pair of alignment gears 747, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the award ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772 Can. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced and the ball drop passage 772 is assembled. Workability can be improved.

  Also, the ball falling from the tank rail member 740 through the front and rear bending passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left and right bending passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . Further, a ball breakage detecting mechanism (ball breakage detecting piece 776 and ball breakage switch 778) for detecting a ball breakage is provided in the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the force is weakened. In this way, it is possible to reliably detect that the ball in the ball drop passage 772 has broken, in other words, that the ball supplied to the prize ball unit 800 has broken (ball breakage).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-mentioned ball passage unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 106 to FIG. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit 800 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the dispensing motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a dispensing member. FIG. 109 is a rear view for illustrating the passage and driving relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG.

  In FIG. 106, the prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 having a bending passage 803 forming a ball passage by a pair of bending passage walls 802, a prize ball passage 810, and a ball extraction passage 811; The unit sub plate 825 covering the rear surface of the unit sub board 825, the relay terminal plate 830 within the prize ball unit attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825, and the substantially central surface area (rear surface side region) And a gear cover 866 covering the detection disc 850 (rotational transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages protruding toward the plate unit sub plate 825 side. The wall 802 forms a bending passage 803. The bending passage wall 802 is protruded at a slightly larger distance than the diameter of the sphere from the upper center to the middle of the upper side of the unit base body 801, but the middle to the middle The side walls of both ends of the unit base body 801 also function from the lower end to the downstream end. Further, a portion where the middle bending passage wall 802 is largely divided into right and left constitutes a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 as a ball feeding rotary body is disposed, and from the lower part of the distribution space 805, the unit base body 801 A passage section wall 809 is formed so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 which are divided into right and left by the downstream end of the.

  That is, two passages are formed on the left and right from the distribution space 805 by the left and right bent passage walls 802 and the passage section walls 809 from the middle to the downstream side, and one of the passages constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage constitutes a ball removal passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided to the left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the dispensing motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is housed in a motor housing space 814 formed at a position avoiding the ball passage (the bending passage 803, the award ball passage 810, the ball extraction passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. It is fixed. The bending passage 803 is formed in a serpentine shape so as to reduce pressure on the sprocket 807 of the ball staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805. An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 is for storing small dust and the like that has entered the inside of the bending passage 803, so that dust and the like accumulated when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3 can be taken out.

  Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a dispensing member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) recesses in which balls are fitted on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing sleeve 806 for supporting the other end of the rotating shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side is formed. , And the counting switch 812 is detachably mounted.

  The counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a ball passes is formed at the tip, and a switch fitting recess 865 conforming to the shape of the rear end is formed by the bent passage wall 802 By doing this, it can be easily and removably attached. A wire (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a relay terminal board 830 in a prize ball unit described later. Further, on the downstream side of the curved passage wall 802 constituting the award ball passage 810, a locking claw engaged with the locking portion 860 formed on the passage cover plate portion 859 integrally formed with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality 813 is formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 engaged with one locking portion 860 on the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  Further, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the dispensing motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 is formed. The cylindrical main body of the dispensing motor 815 is accommodated in the inside of the housing. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed by a screw 817 to the back surface side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 by the pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface. Then, with the discharge motor 815 attached to the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the discharge motor 815 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 and The gear 843 is fixed.

  Further, by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841, a space in the depth width direction in which the above-mentioned bent passage 803, award ball passage 810, and ball release passage 811 are formed. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated and disposed therein. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the dispensing motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the above-described sprocket 807 is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, a guiding protrusion 819 for guiding the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extracting passage 811 to the back surface side of the winning ball unit 800 is projected on the unit base body 801. The induced ball is guided to a ball connection passage 880 to be described later and is finally released to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection weir provided below the island platform). Further, on the upper part of the unit base body 801, a locking elastic claw 820 for locking the connection lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 mentioned above is provided in a protruding manner, A mounting boss for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-like engagement portion 824 for detachably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 in a state in which the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 are held. 823 is provided.

  A rod-like detachable button 822 is provided slidably on the upper side of the unit base body 801 in the button insertion engagement hole 821 so as to be slidable in the depth width direction, and as described later, its front end Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 is concave so that the tip end portion of the locking elastic claw 564 is inserted. Further, the hook-like engagement portion 824 engages with the engagement protrusion 565 formed on the pivotally supporting rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the pivotally support rear surface wall 546 The hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement projection 565 engage with each other by pressing downward. Then, since the locking elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged in the engaged state, the upward movement of the winning ball unit 800 can not be performed.

  The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 is formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. In addition, a mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 in a state in which the unit sub plate 825 is held is a long protrusion toward the rear surface side, and a through hole formed in the unit sub plate 825 After passing through the hole 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover are held in a state in which the unit sub plate 825 is held by screwing a screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 corresponding to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. It is connected with 866.

  The configuration of unit sub plate 825 covering unit base body 801 described above will be described. The unit sub plate 825 is a composite that covers bending passage 803 portion of unit base body 801, distribution space 805 portion, and award ball passage 810 portion. It is configured by attaching an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 to which a dispensing motor 815 is attached to a resin plate member and which covers the downstream portion of the ball removal passage 811. Then, on the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub plate 825, a relay substrate region 826 for attaching the in-a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed in the upper part, A gear area 840 is formed in which 844, 847 and a detection disc 850 are attached.

  The relay substrate area 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit are protruded along the square shape, and the upper and lower sides of one vertical side thereof will be described later. An engaging groove 828 to be engaged with the engaging projection 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw 829 to be engaged with the locking projection 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other vertical side. There is. Further, in the relay substrate area 826, a button insertion hole 834 through which the mounting / dismounting button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the in-prism-ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with a screw (not shown) are formed. .

  The inter-prize-ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the above-described relay substrate area 826 will be described later, including the counting switch 812 provided on the prize-ball unit 800, the payout motor 815, and the rotation angle switch 855 described later. For relaying the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126), a plurality of connectors are provided for that purpose, and the button insertion hole 833 and the mounting boss portion 832 through which the mounting and demounting button 822 is inserted. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are drilled. Thus, the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown) in a state where the inter-prism ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the mounting rib 827 of the relay substrate area 826 The ball unit internal relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub plate 825.

  Also, the inter-prize-ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered by the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one side vertical side of the base cover 835 and a substantially central side of the other side vertical side. ing. In addition, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement projections 836 of the substrate cover 835 are inserted into and engaged with the engagement grooves 828 of the relay substrate area 826, the engagement projections 837 and the engagement claws 829 are easily engaged. The base member cover 835 can cover the in-ball unit inner relay terminal plate 830. Conversely, in the case of removal, the locking claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the locking projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally to the front side to engage the engagement protrusion 836 and the engagement groove portion 828. It can be disengaged from the In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 is inserted through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838 There is. Further, the wiring connected to the in-prism ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

  Next, the gears 843, 844 and 847 provided in the gear area 840 formed on the unit sub plate 825 and the detection disc 850 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the dispensing motor 815 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825 The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. A second gear 844 (rotational transmission gear) meshing with the first gear 843 is pressed into one end of the rear surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 above the first gear 843 and is drilled in the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841. A third gear 847 (rotational transmission gear), which is rotatably provided on a shaft 845 whose other end is supported in the shaft hole 846 and whose second gear 844 is meshed with the second gear 844, is a unit sub plate 825. The shaft 848 which is press-fitted into the shaft hole 849 formed in the housing is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (following gear) meshing with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotating shaft 808 for supporting the sprocket 807.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the tip of motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in the receiving hole formed in gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into and supported by a bearing sleeve 806 formed at the unit base body 801 at one end, and supported at a bearing hole formed at the gear cover 866 at the other end. Sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in distribution space 805 through axial through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of region 840 and detected in the space formed by unit sub plate 825 and gear cover 866. A disk 850 is rotatably supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface of the detection disc 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disc 850 are integrated around the rotation shaft 808. It is supposed to rotate Therefore, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disc 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed a size larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion projecting outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the concave portion of the sprocket 807 (in the case shown , Three detection notches 851 are formed. The detection notch 851 is detected by a light emission / reception type rotation angle switch 855 (rotational position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate attachment portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub plate 825 It is. The rotation angle switch 855 is used to monitor whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 detected within a predetermined interval time during the dispensing operation. Temporarily, when abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (mostly in the ball biting state by the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and reverse a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, ball biting state) It is The number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the above-mentioned winning ball passage 810 and used for counting. In addition, as shown in FIG. 109, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also held by the substrate attachment portion formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, among the plurality of gears provided in the gear area 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotating shaft 845 pressed into the gear cover 866 side. The cover 866 is provided with a mounting hole 867 formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 protruding from the unit base body 801 and penetrating the through hole 858 of the unit sub plate 825. Then, while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub plate 825 side, the mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are By screwing with a screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866 in a matched state, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state in which the unit sub plate 825 is held. Also, on one side of gear cover 866, a wire connected to relay terminal plate 830 in a prize ball unit (for example, a wire connecting a relay terminal plate 830 in a prize ball unit and a payout control board 1186 described later) A wire processing piece 869 is provided protrudingly for holding and putting together.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above, but in the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub plate 825, the inter-prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830, the substrate cover 835 and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is positioned at a lower position of the bending passage 803 where the ball to be dispensed is guided. Further, in the unit base body 801, the sprocket 807 disposed in the ball passage (the bending passage 803, the award ball passage 810, the ball extraction passage 811) and the ball width of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein is provided, and the unit sub plate 825 rotates the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-closing surface side to rotate the sprocket 807 A rotation transmitting member (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disc 850) transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear area 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub plate 825, and a sprocket 807 as a dispensing member to be disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (the bending passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, the ball extraction passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission member (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for connecting the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 to the non-blocked surface side of the unit sub plate 825 The prize ball unit 800 can be thinner than in the case where a part of the dispensing motor or the sprocket is disposed outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further reduced in thickness by forming the ball passages (the flex passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, the ball withdrawal passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in the form of a single passage. Is being promoted. That is, unlike the conventional case where the payout motor 815 is protruded to the front side, the rear side or the side of the winning ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the pivoting rear side wall 546 of the main body frame 3 Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be configured not to protrude further rearward. In FIG. 109, the front end portion of the dispensing motor 815 slightly protrudes from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is, as shown in FIG. Since the front portion of the main body frame 3 is faced from the lower portion for the discharge motor relief opening 572, the projection amount is a degree obtained by subtracting the plate thickness dimension of the axially supported rear surface wall 546 from the protrusion dimension as a result Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the pivotally supported rear face wall 546 is slight. Further, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the gaming board 4 is provided between the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the winning ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. The storage space for storing the rearward projecting portion of the gaming apparatus can be made large in the depth and width directions.

  Furthermore, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotally supporting rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The lower end of the winning ball unit 800 is hooked to the locking groove 573 and the winning ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projection 565. It is pushed down while being in close contact with the side rear surface wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the winning ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projection 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. The lock elastic claws 564 are engaged with the button insertion engagement holes 821 in order to prevent the respective engaged states from being easily released by moving the prize ball unit 800 upward. It is supposed to

  That is, by the engagement of the locking elastic claws 564 with the button insertion engagement holes 821, the upward movement of the winning ball unit 800 in the mounted state is prevented. In this manner, after the winning ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, thereby causing the ball fall of the ball passage unit 770. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the curved passage 803 of the winning ball unit 800 can be communicated via the passage formed by the pair of passage walls 790. Further, when the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 and the prize ball inlet 927 of the full unit 900 described later are connected, and the downstream end of the ball withdrawal passage 811 is the ball withdrawal connection passage. It is connected with the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the locking elastic claws 820 is released and the connection lid member 786 is pivoted to the front side, and then the mounting / dismounting button 822 is pressed to lock the elastic claws 564 for locking. The ball is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the locking elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled up with the attaching / detaching button 822 kept pressed, to thereby obtain the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement of the lower end portion of the hook with the locking groove 573 and the engagement of the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement projection 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, the prize ball unit 800 is It can be easily removed.

[1-3 G. Full tank unit]
Subsequently, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described winning ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the winning ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the full tank unit 900 as viewed from the back, and FIG. 114 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the far port 610, FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view cut at the bottom swinging plate 907 portion provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the far port 610.

  The filling unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the filling unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 as described above, and as shown in FIG. A cover 926 covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is designed such that the balls flowing in from the downstream end of the winning ball passage 810 are guided in a zigzag manner and discharged from the outlet 921. For this reason, a lateral guiding passage 902 is formed at the upstream portion thereof for guiding the balls flowing from the prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 laterally from one end to the other end. A lateral induction receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape to guide the ball laterally is provided at one end immediately below the prize ball inlet 927 in the lateral induction passage 902, and the lateral induction passage is A shock absorbing member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of the nozzle 902 for receiving the impact of the ball flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guiding the ball downstream.

  Also, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is induced to flow in the direction opposite to the flow of the ball in the side guide passage 902 after changing its direction to the downstream side. A reverse side induction passage 905 is formed. The balls having flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 are then led to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the prize of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. You will be led to the ball contact 343.

  A bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the upstream bottom surface of the reverse side induction passage 905, and the bottom surface rocking plate 907 swingably closes the bottom surface opening 906. There is. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape whose upper surface is opened, and a pair of pivotally supporting projections 911 project from the side wall in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the inside. In addition, a circular spring placement recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom of the bottom opening 906. On the other hand, a bottom rocking plate 907 closing the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and a semicircular bearing supported by being fitted to the pivoting protrusion 911 when viewed from the front on the back side downstream side A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring engagement projection 910 with which the upper end of the spring 913 is engaged is provided to project downward at the center of the back surface of the bottom surface swinging plate 907. Therefore, the bottom swinging plate 907 is biased by the biasing force of the spring 913 such that the upstream side is always swung upward. In the spring 913, the bottom swinging plate 907 does not swing downward even when the number of paid out prize balls (for example, 15 pieces) is placed on the bottom swinging plate 907 at one time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or more than the number of dispensed pieces are formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom surface swinging plate 907. Further, on the upstream side of the bottom swinging plate 907, a detection protrusion 909 is projected forward. The detection projection 909 penetrates the communication hole 929 and is positioned in the switch housing space 914 which will be described next, when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom surface rocking plate 907 is rotatably supported on the shaft support projection 911. It has become.

  A switch storage space 914 for storing a full tank switch 916 is integrally formed outside the side wall of the upstream end of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the switch storage space 914 at the upper end of the reverse side induction passage 905. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 for holding the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch including a light projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Furthermore, a far ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 114, the far ball passage 922 is formed by bending so that the far ball inlet 923 on the upstream side communicates with the above-described far port 610 and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guiding passage 920. It is done. For this reason, the farball taken into the far mouth 610 is guided to the front guidance passage 920 through the farball passage 922 which is bent from the farball inlet 923, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball contact 343 as a dish unit. It is returned to 300.

  Further, in the box main body 901, an engagement piece 924 which is engaged with a unit engagement groove 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923 A hooking projection 925 is formed which engages with a hooking piece 928 formed on the lid 926. The hooking projections 925 are appropriately formed on upper left and right rear side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape to cover the upper surfaces of the side induction passage 902, the reverse side induction passage 905, the front induction passage 920, and the far ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball inlet 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end 902. Further, around the lid 926, a hooking piece 928 for engaging with the hooking projection 925 of the box main body 901 is protruded downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the winning ball passage 810 of the winning ball unit 800 are on the upstream side of the side guidance passage 902 from the winning ball inlet 927. It is guided laterally by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball that has collided with the buffer member 904 is guided downstream as it is in the reverse lateral guiding passage 905 in the opposite direction to the guiding direction of the side guiding passage 902 and is guided to the front guiding passage 920. From the exit 921, it is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication rod 343. Further, the ball of the far ball entering from the far ball inlet 923 is also weakened by the bent far ball passage 922 and joins the forward guiding passage 920, and from the exit 921 of the forward guiding passage 920 through the prize ball connection 343 It is led to the dish unit 300.

  When the ball flows naturally from inside the side induction passage 902 to the reverse side induction passage 905 when the ball naturally flows in the full tank unit 900 under normal conditions, it falls to the bottom swinging plate 907. Since the resilient force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of paid-out balls is about normal, the bottom swinging plate 907 does not swing, and as shown by the solid line in FIG. The switch enters between the light emitter and the light receiver of the full tank switch 916 so that the switch does not conduct (OFF). On the other hand, when the winning balls are stored in the tray unit 300 and the balls are filled in the full tank unit 900, the bottom swing formed in the entire upstream side of the front guide passage 920 and the reverse side guide passage 905. The bottom swinging plate 907 swings downward against the biasing force of the spring 913 by the pressure of the ball stored on the moving plate 907, and as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. It comes out from between the light emitter and the light receiver of the light receiving type full tank switch 916, and the switch is in a conductive state (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational drive of the payout motor 815 of the winning ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of winning balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of winning balls Is to be stopped after being paid out.

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is performed by the bottom swing plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the passage bottom of the passage (in the illustrated case, the opposite side induction passage 905) where the ball flows down. 916 is actuated, and the biasing member (spring 913) urges the bottom swinging plate 907 to swing when a certain amount of balls are mounted without swinging due to the flow of the ball at the normal time. In this case, the ball clogged is not detected due to the ball clogged compared to the conventional method in which the ball clogged is detected by placing the ball on the bottom surface or the like of some of the channels. Can be reliably prevented. This is something which can reliably detect the fullness of the ball.

  Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, since the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 is detachably attached, the full tank apparatus is formed in the main body frame as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to form a passage for the full tank structure in the main body frame as compared to one assembled inside the dispensing passage. In addition, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. There is no chance that the winning balls will fly out of the dish unit 300. Furthermore, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, since the far ball passage 922 guiding the far ball is arranged to weaken and join the ball in the middle of the forward guiding passage 920 that pays out the winning balls. Feal spheres can be merged without disturbing the flow of the spheres.

[1-4. Lock device]
Next, the lock device 1000 attached vertically along the rear side end side on the open side of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3. FIG. 118 is an enlarged side cross sectional view showing the hooking structure of the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view cut horizontally in a position slightly lower than the longitudinal center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 120 shows the detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 121 is an enlarged sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the lock device 1000, a perspective view (B) seen from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view seen from the rear side of the lock device 1000 (A FIG. 123 is a perspective view (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding wedge 1040 and a main frame sliding wedge 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, FIG. Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and Fig. 124 is for a door frame Is a front view for explaining the action of Do杆 1040 and the main frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 125 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3 from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 and, as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated case) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and the upper and lower end portions between the rising portion of the first side wall 540 and the upper portion of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, which will be described next, is supported by a lock attachment hole 547 which is formed by being notched in the middle and a lock attachment hole 547 which is formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 bends metal so as to become U-shaped in cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame are provided slidably therein. The width dimension is extremely thin compared to a conventional lock device integrated on a base formed into an L-shaped cross section. This makes the size of the game board 4 extremely large in the left and right direction and the vertical direction as described above, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is large. A mounting structure that allows the lock device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by forming a smaller width dimension of the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment because the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. Then, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, so in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 The sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 have an anti-tampering structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook through opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 are penetrated is established at the upper and lower sides of the U-shaped base 1001 opposite to the open side. And a screw fixing portion 1003 is horizontally provided in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 123) in close contact with the first side wall 540, and the side surface 1001a does not contact the first side wall 540 on the open side Locking projections 1004 are formed protruding from the upper end portion and the middle portion (see FIG. 123) and the lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the locking projection 1004 is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (Refer to FIG. 118). In this state, since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. It can be fixed. In addition, attachment by screw of lock device 1000 is formed not only at the upper and middle screw stop portion 1003 but also in the upper vicinity of screw stop portion 1003 and cylinder lock through hole 526 formed on lock attachment piece 1008 described later. The lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 corresponding to the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, at the time of the attachment, the locking projections 1004 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 and positioned and locked. Screws 1003 formed at two points on the closed side (rear part) of the base 1001 and screws 1003 formed on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 into the lock mounting holes 547 Since the structure is fixed by a screw, the front part of the lock device 1000 is locked by the locking projection 1004 and the lock hole 548, and the rear portion of the lock device 1000 is fixed by the screw 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower part of the lock device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment hole 547, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width dimension, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front and rear portions of the lock device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (or the fixing structure) of the front part is provided so as to protrude on the side surface 1001 a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001. And the screwing portion 1003 and the screwing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed to protrude horizontally from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  In addition, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper part, middle part and lower part of both side faces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding weir 1040 and the main frame sliding weir 1050 are By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in a stored state and caulking it, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001. it can. That is, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are formed one each for the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle, lower portions of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050, respectively. The rivet 1006 penetrates the long holes for rivets 1055 and 1061 so that the door frame sliding wedge 1040 can move upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050, as shown in FIG. 122 (C). A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Furthermore, in the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side, and the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3 on the open side. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 is protruded in a lateral direction, and further, an insertion longitudinal opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are provided on the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retracts. This point will be described in detail later. Also, with the lock attachment piece 1008 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the front end of the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 is positioned lower than the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510. The lock attachment piece 1008 is provided with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 passes, and an attachment hole formed in the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are drilled at two upper and lower positions, and further, a screw stop portion 1003 for mounting the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is drilled.

  In addition, the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 is an opening for the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 to enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamperproof members 1023 and 1032, and the escape lateral hole 1022 forms an escape hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  Referring to the cylinder lock 1010 attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 described above, the cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body fixed to the front of the lock attachment substrate 1011 and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body is a lock attachment substrate An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 which engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 when it is rotated, and the other end The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when the side is rotated. In the cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009, and the attachment holes 1013 and the lock attachment piece 1008 are formed in the upper and lower two places of the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by aligning the mounting hole 1014 with the mounting hole 1014 and screwing with a screw 1012.

  Next, the tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are provided to prevent the body frame slide rod 1050 from being improperly lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. . Thus, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate configured to be swingable around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 described above is the swing shaft hole 1025. Of the insertion holes 1005 and the rivets 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050, the mounting holes 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached by the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006.

  Further, in the first fraud prevention member 1023, a vertically long projecting piece insertion hole 1026 overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 is opened in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 is inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. It is supposed to be able to That is, the second engagement projection 1018 penetrates through the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, whereby the elevation engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is adapted to be engaged. In addition, an outer outline obliquely above the opening position of the protrusion insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is an inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 abuts on the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, and when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 The first fraud preventing member 1023 swings (clockwise in FIG. 125 (B)) about the swinging shaft hole 1025 by the contact.

  Furthermore, a stopper piece portion 1027 is provided on the outer contour of the first fraud prevention member 1023 at a position obliquely below the protrusion insertion hole 1026, and a restriction projection piece 1031 is provided below the stopper piece portion 1027. Pin holes 1029 and connection holes 1030 are formed at the top and the bottom of the projecting piece 1031. The stopper piece portion 1027 enters the engagement prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is incorrect. To prevent sliding. In addition, although the control protrusion 1031 is connected by the spring 1035 with the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, when the spring 1035 is connected, the biasing direction of the second fraud prevention member 1032 To regulate the movement of In the pin hole 1029, the guide pin 1028 is inserted, with the guide pin 1028 inserted, with the guide pin 1028 being fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first tamper resistant member 1023. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally elongated opening formed at the lowermost end. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  The second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the above-described first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of a reverse "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed in the upper one end, and a spring engagement is formed in the upper other end A stop hole 1036 is bored and an abutment 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is made to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and to be connected by the connection pin 1034, and the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base 1001 at one end. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. The contact portion 1037 is in contact with a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The actions of the above-described first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIG. 123, a plate-shaped closing member 1038 is disposed at the lower end of the U-shaped base 1001, and the lower end of the U-shaped base 1001 is closed by the closing member 1038. A wire or the like can be inserted into the U-shaped substrate 1001 from the lower side of the V-shaped substrate 1001 to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed. The closing member 1038 includes locking portions extending upward from both longitudinal ends, and the locking portions are locked to the lower hook through openings 1002 and the locking projections 1004 in the U-shaped base 1001. As a result, it can be attached to the lower end of the U-shaped base 1001.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally integrated toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. It is protrusively installed. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main body frame It projects forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed on the front door 3 and is locked to a hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 is engaged with the hook cover 158 by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. It can be released.

  In addition, a vertically long rivet elongated hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and for the rivet at the top of the plurality of rivet elongated holes 1042. A guide protrusion 1043 is provided at the lower side of the long hole 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which a rivet 1006 to be inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is penetrated, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the upward movement of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. It is vertically formed. Then, in the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating and in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042. Further, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050, and the sliding ridge 1040 for the door frame The sliding action between the body and the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is engaged with the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is a sliding wedge 1050 for the main frame. The spring hook portion 1057 formed on the upper hook member 1051 is locked. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is biased downward and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is biased upward. A contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape in the middle of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. The contact elastic piece 1047 is formed into a convex shape by being punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by pressing, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 for the door frame internally. It is intended to prevent the sliding wedge 1040 from rattling.

  Further, both longitudinal play holes 1044 and upward engagement holes 1045 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the free end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is moved so that the play hole 1044 does not get in the way of its rotation operation. Make up a space to In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 is engaged such that the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is lifted by its turning operation. It is to do. A relief notch 1049 which is a notch larger in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed at the lower rear of the vertical side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. The relief notch portion 1049 is formed so as not to disturb the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 in order to reliably engage the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding weir 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire weir 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; It consists of That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is not necessarily constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are metal A plate made of aluminum is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 protruding rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projection moving hole 1056 are formed in the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connection hole 1058 are formed at the lower end portion of the vertical side, and a contact portion 1059 is further formed at the upper side and the lower side. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing projection 38 provided on the upper inside of the outer frame 2 on the open side, and the hook portion is upward. It is formed.

  The rivet long hole 1055 corresponds to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and in the normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet long hole 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet elongated hole 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. In the protrusion moving hole 1056, the guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted as described above, and the mutual movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is performed. It is supposed to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is one in which the other end of the spring 1048 is locked as described above. The connection hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053. Furthermore, when the contact portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, it abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051 is performed smoothly and without rattling. In order to

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion, and the rivet elongated hole 1061, the lowering engagement hole 1062, the play hole 1063 and the projection are projected from the upper to the lower of the plate surface portion. A connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front longitudinal side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower end of the rear longitudinal side, and the upper side and the lower side A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 is engaged with the closing projection 41 provided on the lower side of the open side of the outer frame 2 through the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001, and the hook portion is upward. It is formed. The rivet long hole 1061 corresponds to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and in a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet long hole 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lower end of the rivet elongated hole 1061.

  Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. The lower engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by its turning operation when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and turned. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip end portion of the second engagement projection 1018 so as not to disturb the turning operation when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. In the protrusion moving hole 1064, the guide protrusion 1043 below the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted as described above, and the mutual movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is performed. It is supposed to guide you. Further, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1060. Further, when the contact portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, it abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 is performed smoothly and without rattling. In order to

  As mentioned above, although each member which constitutes lock device 1000 was explained, in order to assemble this lock device 1000, upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 of sliding lever 1050 for main frames are connected with connecting wire rod 1053 In that state, the guide projection 1043 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length Holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the overlapped state. While the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001 You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. However, when inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud preventing member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Before attaching the first tamperproof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamperproof member 1023 and the second tamperproof member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 has to be inserted into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the body frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036 to form a second fraud prevention member 1032 Is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tamper resistant member 1023.

  In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While inserting into the door hook hole 549, the hooking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the lock locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 and screw horizontally projected in that state are moved upward. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. 117 by aligning the locking portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. it can. In the case of the present embodiment, in particular, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001, The screwing portion 1003 and the screwing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the present invention are formed to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001 b in close contact with the first side wall 540.

  The operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening and closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening and closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state in which the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are engaged, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding wedge 1040 and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are engaged. There is. As shown in FIG. 124B, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in the direction of entering the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in that state, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 and pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the biasing force of the spring 1048, and The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and descended. As a result, since the locking projections of the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are released, the main frame is pulled by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be released to the outer frame 2.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same elevated position as shown in FIG. 124A). 1065, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are closed by the projections 38 and 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. The body frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, and finally, the upward claws of the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing projections 38, 41 are locked again. The main frame sliding rod 1050 ascends and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, so pulling the door frame 5 to the front side causes the door frame 5 to be released. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 124A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 158 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. Since the sliding door for door frame 1040 ascends upward, the sliding hook 1040 of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 is lowered to return to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, locking in the entire length in the vertical direction of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is securely performed, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are forcibly opened up and the illegal act of inserting illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval There is also the advantage that it can not be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing this, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. In this case, a piano wire or the like may be hooked on hooks 1054, 1065 of the main frame sliding lever 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, and an illegal act of lowering this may be performed. It is supposed that you can not do such cheating. The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125A, the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 It is in the state of contact. In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 becomes the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. For this reason, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding wedge 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It can not be taken down (unlocked) illegally, and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and unlocking the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing about 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to retract from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 It can be opened.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with the position 1032 is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 125 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. . Therefore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, for the door frame provided inside Since the sliding rod 1040 and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame are accommodated in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, they are completely covered. Even when trying to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the closed space of the incorrect tool is made by the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Since the intrusion is blocked, it has a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, as described in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment is used for the door frame inside of the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin compared to the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for slidingly setting the sliding rod 1040 and the main frame sliding rod 1050 and for operating the lock device 1000 is lower than the lower edge of the game board Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and the up and down direction is made extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the body frame 3 is made large, It can be attached firmly to the back of 3. And since it is attached so that the open side of section U-shaped faces the back of body frame 3, in the state where lock device 1000 was attached to body frame 3, sliding frame 1040 for door frames provided in the inside and the body The frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. Therefore, a main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Fraudulent acts such as pulling down the frame sliding rod 1050 can not be easily performed.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, locking projections 1004 formed at three places on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 and positioned and locked. The lock device 1000 has a structure in which the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle, and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws. The front part of the lock is locked by the lock projection 1004 and the lock lock hole 548, and the rear part of the lock device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the above embodiment, the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to form a screwing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder frame through hole 526 of the main body frame 3. Instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 passes through the lock attachment piece 1008 using the screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008. The lock mounting holes to be screwed may be formed on the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 526. Also, even if the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be made on the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear of the locking device 1000 It has been confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the embodiment described above, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. A sliding door 1040 for the door frame and a sliding door 1050 for the main frame are attached to the opposite side 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 by means of rivets etc. L-shaped base (lock base), and the closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 540 for the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main body frame The sliding rod 1050 may be housed. Even in this case, the mounting structure and the fraud prevention structure similar to those of the embodiment can be obtained.

[1-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 1100 attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front side FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 130 is a front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder that is the main component of the substrate unit, and FIG. 132 is a rear view of the substrate unit, FIG. 132 is a rear view of the substrate unit, and FIG. 133 is a rear view of the substrate unit with the payout control substrate box and the terminal substrate box removed. FIG. 135 is a schematic view showing the connection relationship of each substrate provided in the substrate unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing an electrical connection between the substrate unit and the game board, and FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a payout control substrate and the substrate unit of 137 is a part of a rear view of a pachinko machine showing lines etc. FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional location of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is removed in FIGS. 137 is a front view of the game board incorporating the prevention mechanism, and FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C of FIG.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) formed in a plurality of lower portions on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, Attach the various boards of the door relay board 1102, the power supply board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, the payout control board box 1105, the main drawer relay board 1107, and the sub drawer relay board 1108 to the resin molded frame substrate holder 1101. It is composed of Among the above-mentioned substrates, the door relay substrate 1102, the power supply substrate box 1103, the terminal substrate box 1104, and the delivery control substrate box 1105 are redundantly attached in the front-rear direction to the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101. The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As described later, since the power supply substrate 1136 creates and supplies +34 V, +18 V, and +9 V, it is a very high temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply substrate 1136 is increased. For this reason, by overlappingly attaching the payout control board box 1105 for housing the payout control board 1186 on the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103, it is not necessary to receive the rising heat. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are attached by covering the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed in one rear side (right side in FIG. 130). A relay substrate recess 1110 for attaching the door relay substrate 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square-shaped recess so as to conform to the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102, and the upper and lower sides in the relay substrate recess 1110 are the back surface of the door relay substrate 1102. Of the door relay substrate 1102 is formed in the recess 1110 for the relay substrate, and the detent 1111 is formed to be engaged with the surface of one side vertical side of the door relay substrate 1102 in a state where the door relay substrate 1102 is accommodated ing. Further, mounting bosses 1112 for engaging with engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply substrate box 1103 and fastening with screws (not shown) are provided on the upper and lower sides of the relay substrate recess 1110 near the outside. It is protrusively installed.

  In addition, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting the wires to be passed inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to protrude in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hooked between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece ing. Furthermore, the region from the top of the relay substrate recess 1110 of the frame substrate holder 1101 to a portion slightly closer to the other end than the approximate center becomes a region for mounting the power supply substrate box 1103 (lower region on the right side described below) On the upper and lower sides thereof, contact protrusions 1115 that contact the back surface of the power supply substrate box 1103 are provided in a protruding manner. Therefore, in the state where power supply substrate box 1103 is mounted in contact with contact protrusion 1115 in the power supply substrate box attachment area, there is a space between the back surface of power supply substrate box 1103 and the vertical surface of frame substrate holder 1101. Wirings for connecting the substrates to each other are accommodated in the space, and two accommodated wiring processing pieces 1114 are capable of locking and collecting the accommodated wirings.

  From the other end side of the region to which the power supply substrate box 1103 is attached to the other end side (left side in FIG. 130) of the frame substrate holder 1101, the amount of backward protrusion is formed large. That is, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a step shape that is high on the left side and low on the right side at a position slightly left from the center when viewed from the back, and the low region on the right side is for mounting the power supply substrate box 1103 (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as "power supply substrate box attachment region"). Then, on the other end side of the power supply substrate box attachment area, an insertion port 1115a is formed into which insertion protrusions 1134 which are provided to protrude above and below the other end of the power supply substrate box 1103 are inserted. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply substrate box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion opening 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply substrate box 1103 are attached to the mounting boss 1112 from above The power supply substrate box 1103 can be fixed to the frame substrate holder 1101 by inserting and fixing with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above-described step-like high region is one of the regions for attaching the dispensing control substrate box 1105 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "dispensing substrate substrate mounting region") The L-shaped concave wiring arrangement space 1116 is formed in part of the step-like high region. Wiring openings 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) are formed on the bottom of the wiring arrangement space 1116, and the wiring held by the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply substrate box mounting area is It is pulled out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 from the wiring arrangement space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121. Further, on the other end side (the left end side in FIG. 127) of the dispensing control substrate box mounting area, a locking projection 1117 for engaging the engaging elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control substrate box 1105 is formed to protrude. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 128, FIG. 129 and FIG. 131, the out ball passage 1119 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out-ball passage 1119 is located on the downstream side of the out-port 606 (see FIG. 78) described above, the downstream side of the ball removal discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the upper side to correspond to the drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is narrowly formed so as to discharge the balls in a row. Therefore, when the substrate unit 1100 is attached to the main frame 3, as shown in FIG. 71, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support projection 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. And, from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball removing ball is released toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, a collection weir of an island).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 and on the front side corresponding to the dispensing control board box mounting area, a predetermined interval in the lateral direction between the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 in the upper area thereof A drawer attachment area 1120 is formed in an empty and parallel manner. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204, 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107, 1108 are penetrated to project drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the respective relay boards 1107, 1108, respectively. Bonding guide holes 1126 and guide holes 1125 are formed at the upper and lower sides of the intermediate position of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joining guide holes 1126 are connected to the board unit 1100 with the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) and the game board 4 provided along with the work of attaching the game board 4 to the main frame 3. The junction guide projection 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 is inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. It is On the other hand, in the guide hole 1125, when the substrate unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) protruding from the main body frame 3 is inserted. It is intended to facilitate positioning work and installation work. In addition, mounting pieces 1122 for mounting the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are protruded toward the outside on the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, and the mounting holes 112 527 of the main body frame 3 are provided. The substrate unit 1100 is attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). Note that, as shown in FIG. 70, the mounting hole 527 is formed to have an outer peripheral wall that conforms to the outer shape of the mounting piece 1122. Further, on the outer side wall of the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame substrate holder 1101, a wire hooking piece 1123 for locking the wire is formed to protrude.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, but the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay substrate 1102 mounted on the relay substrate recessed portion 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay substrate 1102 is an internal connection terminal of multi-pin connector type. A door frame connection terminal 1131 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. The door frame connection terminal 1131 is provided on the door frame 5 as seen from the back as shown in FIG. 132 even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101. The door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as the electric lamp component and the LED, which are made of lamps and LEDs, is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. Also, the internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to the door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 by the internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring arrangement space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 described above are laid.

  The power supply board box 1103 attached to the power supply board box mounting area on the rear side of the frame substrate holder 1101 has a box main body 1132 for fixing the power supply board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and a cover for covering the box main body 1132 And 1133. In the box main body 1132, engaging and locking holes 1135 engaging with the mounting bosses 1112 are integrally formed at the upper and lower ends of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusions 1134 inserted at the upper and lower ends of the other end are integrally formed. Are formed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 133, power supply substrate 1136 is not covered by cover 1133 (on the right and left in FIG. 133), as shown in FIG. 133, for power switch 1137, power line connector 1138, CR unit power connector 1139 and grounding. A connector 1140 and a payout control board power supply connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all the electric devices of the pachinko machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used.

  Also, the power supply line connector 1138 connects the power supply wiring from the power supply wiring of AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied in the island, and grounds the noise etc. charged in the pachinko machine 1 as a frame ground to the outside Is a connector for The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card type ball rental machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The grounding connector 1140 is electrically connected to various grounding wires provided to the pachinko machine 1 for preventing electrostatic charge, and noise etc. which has entered the pachinko machine 1 is externally grounded via the power supply line connector 1138. Is a connector to

  Specifically, a ground wire for removing noise and the like from door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a ball flowing down tank rail member 740 A ground wire for removing the etc. is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as a frame ground FG1, and a ground wire for removing noise etc. from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as a frame ground FG1. ing. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame grounds of the power supply line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the frame grounds. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the payout control board power supply connector 1141, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186.

  Then, another control substrate (for example, the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 housed in the peripheral substrate box 622 or the main control substrate 4100 housed in the main control substrate box 624 via the payout control substrate 1186 by the power supply wiring 1214 Power supply etc.). The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the power supply connector for dispensing control substrate 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and pulled out from the back of the dispensing control substrate box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. There is. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover 1133 of the power supply substrate box 1103 is formed in a step-like shape, and the region where the step is high is the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal substrate box 1104. The lower area of the mounting area 1143 is a mounting area 1143 for mounting the dispensing control board box 1105. The mounting area 1143 constitutes a mounting area for mounting the horizontally long payout control board box 1105 together with the above-described payout control board box mounting area of the frame substrate holder 1101. An engagement hole 1146 is formed substantially at the center of the above-mentioned stepped portion, into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is engaged and inserted.

  In the cover body 1133 constituting the attachment area 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104, the positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engagement piece 1147 formed on the back side of the terminal board box 1104 respectively. And a mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed to have an L-shaped cross section, while the mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous. After being inserted into the wide part of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece portion 1147 and the attachment engagement hole are made to slide in one direction (in the case shown, the central direction of the frame substrate holder 1101) The narrow portion of 1144 is engaged. When the hooking piece 1149 is provided at the lower part of the other side of the terminal board box 1104 and the terminal board box 1104 is slidingly engaged with the cover 1133, the hooking piece 1149 is a delivery control board box 1105. And a portion of the box body 1180 of the Note that this engagement is such an engagement state that the terminal substrate box 1104 is easily disengaged by slidingly moving the terminal substrate box 1104 in the non-engagement direction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the terminal board box 1104 has an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and a payout control board terminal 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152 and a power ground terminal 1153. Two substrates, a CR unit terminal plate 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a delivery control substrate terminal 1155, are accommodated in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a provide various information signals necessary for managing the pachinko machine 1 such as a big hit information output signal and a starting opening winning information output signal externally (for example, These information signals are mainly derived from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624, and the main drawer relay connector 1200 described later in detail. It is transmitted to the payout control substrate 1186 through the connection, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by the connection between the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control substrate terminal 1156 provided on the payout control substrate 1186. Ru.

  The power indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wire of the remaining number indicator of the prepaid card, the rental ball switch, and the return switch of the pachinko machine 1, for example, provided in the plate unit 300. . The power supply ground terminal 1153 is composed of two connectors, one of the connectors (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power supply connector 1139 of the power supply board 1136, and the other connector is the power supply board 1136 Wiring from one of the plurality of grounding connectors 1140 is connected. Furthermore, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wire from a CR unit (not shown), and by connecting the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control substrate 1186 and the payout control substrate terminal 1155. The delivery control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 is connected to the external terminal board 1150a for deriving game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Although both substrates of the CR unit terminal board 1150b to be relayed are housed, they are conventionally housed in separate substrate boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In the above, one terminal board box 1104 is assembled and attached to the frame substrate holder 1101. For this reason, in the case of the present embodiment, in particular, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which they are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected by wiring.

  Next, the delivery control board box 1105 which can be mounted across the delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is mainly shown in FIGS. This will be described with reference to 132. The dispensing control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long rectangular dispensing control board 1186 is fixed with a screw or the like (not shown), and a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the dispensing control board 1186 It consists of

  The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 132) and caulked and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by the separation and cutting portion 1183. As a result, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation and cutting portion 1183 can not be separated unless it is cut. However, caulking and fixing at the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking one of a plurality of places (four places indicated by the numerals 1 to 4 in the case of the drawing) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to three times. Of course, in the case of fraudulent separation, it is possible to immediately know whether or not there has been an act of fraud since a trace of disconnection will remain.

  In the center of one short side of the box main body 1180, an engagement piece 1182 to be inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply substrate box 1103 is protrudingly formed, and at the lower side of the other short side. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed to be elastically engaged with the locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Therefore, in order to attach the dispensing control substrate box 1105 to the frame substrate holder 1101, after the engagement piece 1182 is inserted into the engagement hole 1146, the engagement elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the engagement projection 1117. It can be easily installed.

  Then, in a state where the delivery control board box 1105 is mounted over the delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed in the cover 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The dispensing control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it can not be moved in the horizontal direction or in the vertical direction. Conversely, when dismounting, pressing the engaging elastic piece 1184 in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to release the engagement between the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the payout control board box 1105, The withdrawal control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101 by pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146.

  Further, the dispensing control substrate 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 described above has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b at one side (right side in FIG. 132). There are provided a prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED display 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removing switch 4132. A full tank switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (the left side in FIG. 132).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which the wiring from the door frame opening switch 4133 for detecting that the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame open switch terminal 1185 b is a connector to which the wiring from the main body frame open switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay substrate 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the delivery control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150 b as described above.

  The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which the wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error release switch 4131 is operated, a guide of a release method according to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball extraction switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (the ball extraction is started). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to the inspection device when inspecting the dispensing control board 1186, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected by the power supply wiring 1214 to the payout control substrate power supply connector 1141 of the power supply substrate 1136 as described above.

  The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which a wire from the launch motor 695 of the striking launch device 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which a wire from the touch sensor 420 and the emission stop switch 422 provided inside the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power wiring 1215.

  In the vicinity of the left of the error release switch 4131, resistors R1194a to R1194d are disposed as shown in FIG. The resistances R1194a to R1194d are ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) intrudes into various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. To prevent instability, the detailed description of which will be described later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to the main drawer connector 626 (game board connector: see FIG. 78) provided on the relay terminal board 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4 A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) and a payout control board connector 1201 connected via the signal connection 1215 to the internal connection terminals 1195 of the payout control board 1186 are provided at the top and bottom.

  In addition, an auxiliary drawer relay connector 1202 is connected to the auxiliary drawer relay board 1108 with an auxiliary drawer connector 627 (game board connector: see FIG. 78) provided on the relay terminal board 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A (holder-side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via the internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay substrate 1102 and the internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. Also, in the main drawer relay substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108, support holes 1204 and 1205 are drilled on the left and right sides of each substrate, and a drawer mounting boss is provided to project the support holes 1204 and 1205 in the drawer mounting region 1120. The main drawer relay substrate 1107 and the sub-drawer relay substrate 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer attachment area 1120 by being inserted into the housing 1118, and then firmly fixed by covering with the substrate cover 1109.

  By the way, in the board cover 1109, a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are provided with rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, and 1209 to project outside the substrate cover 1109, and a pin on which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back side of the substrate cover 1109 Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 127) are formed, and at the left and right ends, fixing holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer attachment area 1120 by covering the base cover 1109 with the board cover 1109 while inserting and fixing the fixing hole 1211 with a screw (not shown).

  In the above, the configuration of the substrate unit 1100 has been described, but in the case of the present embodiment, among the various substrates necessary for controlling the driving of the pachinko machine 1, the main components to be replaced along with the change of the game board 4 A door relay board 1102 other than the control board 4100 and the liquid crystal control board 4150, a power supply board 1136 accommodated in the power supply board box 1103, an external terminal board 1150 accommodated in the terminal board box 1104, and the dispensing control board box 1105 The assembled unit is assembled into a frame substrate holder 1101 in advance, and the assembled substrate unit 1100 is assembled into a unit by a simple operation of simply attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the back side lower portion of the main body frame 3. Improve work efficiency compared to various board mounting work that was mounted on the back side of the frame 3 It can be. Further, in this case, since the wiring of each substrate to be unitized into the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated inside the frame substrate holder 1101, the wiring for connecting the substrates does not get messed up and disorderedly, and laying orderly can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main drawer relay board 1107 having the main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the substrate unit 1100 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 having the sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector) As shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal board 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3 as the game board 4 is mounted from the front side as shown in FIG. 626 and the secondary drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are respectively connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and the secondary drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), so the installation of the game board 4 and the connection between the boards Can be done at the same time. Therefore, the game board 4 can be replaced easily.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires a wiring connection with various electric devices provided in the main body frame 3 is A terminal board box 1104 requiring connection work with a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost easily visible position of the board unit 1100, while a power supply board with less need for connection work with the outside Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are disposed inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to be minimum. However, in the case of the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 which are disposed inside, all the terminal parts connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection with drawer connector)]
Next, the electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the substrate unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), by connecting the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 side, electrical connection can be made. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are provided with terminals 626a and 627a as shown in FIG. 135 (b), and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As such, the contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 side, as shown in FIG. 135 (c), the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into electrical conduction by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a.

  Thereby, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side depend on various control boards (for example, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. Further, on the drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the substrate unit 1100 side, voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply substrate 1136 are formed. As described above, by detachably attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the substrate unit 1100 side. The supply line can be connected in a detachable manner.

  The terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a in this embodiment adopt a bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be accidentally touched and bent during operation, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small coefficient of friction is employed for plating the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment or detachment of the game board 4 is ensured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main unit frame 3 and the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 is turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a is performed, specifically, Since a large current (a rush current described later) flows in the contacts for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcedly pushed into the main frame 3 to attach it in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or the contact 1200a is the drawer connector 1200 when the game board 4 is removed from the main frame. It peels off from it and is damaged, and the drawer connector 1200 can not be used.

  In addition, if the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, the various control boards may malfunction or the electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to the breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control substrate 4100 described later to cope with the problem. The detailed description will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring etc. with the prize ball unit]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control substrate 1186 stored in the payout control substrate box 1105 and the winning ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit internal relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball breakage switch connector 830d, the grounding connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

  The wiring from the counting switch 812 is connected to the counting switch connector 830a, the wiring from the discharging motor 815 is connected to the dispensing motor connector 830b, and the wiring from the rotating angle switch 855 is connected to the rotation angle switch connector 830c. The ball disconnection switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball disconnection switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the grounding connector 830e is connected to the grounding wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control substrate connector 830f is connected to the winning ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control substrate 1186 by a wire (harness).

  Wiring from the counting switch 812, wiring from the dispensing motor 815, grounding wire from the dispensing motor 815, and the winning ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball breakage switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855 The harness is held together by a wiring processing piece 869.

  The balls supplied from the island are stored in the winning ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball passage unit 770, and guided to the winning ball unit 800, as described above. When the balls are charged against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. For this reason, the prize ball unit 800 is in an environment susceptible to noise.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is susceptible to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Further, the above-described harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the winning ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the winning ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 147. FIG. FIG. 139 is a perspective view from the back of the pachinko machine with the cover open, FIG. 140 is a side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 141 seen from the open side of the cover in the pachinko machine Fig. 142 is a perspective view, and Fig. 142 is a perspective view of the cover of the pachinko machine as viewed from the pivoting side of the cover; Fig. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine; Fig. 144 is a bottom view of the cover Fig. 145 is a perspective view of the payout control substrate box in contact with the light emitting device, Fig. 145 is a cross sectional view taken along the line A-A of Fig. 143, Fig. 146 is a cross sectional view taken along the line B B of Fig. 143; It is C sectional drawing.

  The cover body 1250 is for covering the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3 and is formed of a synthetic resin in the form of a dish in which the side wall of the slightly elongated rectangular shape rises (in the upper half of the side wall portion or rectangular plate portion (A plurality of air holes are formed.), A plurality (four in the case of illustration) of which the insertion shaft is supported by the cover body support cylindrical portion 575 formed on the main body frame 3 on the side wall of one longitudinal side thereof ) Is integrally formed. Further, an engagement piece 1252 engaged with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the ball passage unit 770 is formed on the other side of the vertical side and slightly on the upper side. Then, by inserting the pivot support pin 1251 of the cover 1250 into the cover support cylindrical portion 575, the cover 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to open and close freely, and the engagement piece 1252 is formed in the cover engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover 1250 can be closed to the main frame 3, and the back of various components including the main control board box 624 provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In addition, what is necessary is just to cancel | release engagement with the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785, in open | releasing.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the case of the drawing, through holes which allow the locking protruding hooks 570 projected from the locking walls 569 of the main body frame 3 to penetrate through the locking holes 1253 and the locking walls 569 of the main frame 3 And 1254 are formed. Then, with the cover 1250 closed, the lock hole 1253 of the cover 1250 and the lock hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are made to coincide with each other and fixed with a screw (not shown). The rear opening 580 can be closed fixed. Then, since the locking protruding hook piece 570 penetrates the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed to the main body frame 3, for example, the locking hooking protruding hook piece 570 By locking the cover body 1250, only the person in charge having the padlock key can open the cover body 1250.

  Furthermore, since the cover 1250 of this example covers the back surface of the main control board box 624 in the closed state, the RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 and the inspection device are connected. The connection operation opening 1255 is formed at a position corresponding to the test terminals 624 b and 624 c, and the front end of the side wall of the lower side of the cover 1250 is closed and the cover 1181 of the delivery control board box 1105 It comes in contact with the surface.

  Specifically, the connection operation opening 1255 is formed in a rectangular shape on the upper portion of the contact lower side wall 1256 of the lower side of the cover 1250, and the size thereof is as shown in FIG. The RAM clear switch 624a provided to be exposed to the outside and the test terminals 624b and 624c to which the inspection device is connected are opened in size. Further, inside the connection operation opening 1255, an upright wall 1257 and an abutment protrusion 1258 which are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 in a closed state are protruded. The standing wall 1257 is formed relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1255, and the abutment projection 1258 protrudes relatively low along the one opening edge from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1255 The standing wall 1257 and the abutment projection 1258 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624, as shown in FIGS. Of the main control board box 624 so as to prevent an unauthorized action from being performed on the main control board box 624.

  Next, the contact lower side wall 1256 formed on the lower side of the cover 1250 will be described. When the cover 1250 is closed to the main frame 3, the contact lower side wall 1256 is shown in FIGS. 146 and 147. As described above, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the delivery control substrate box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is abutted. Therefore, on the upper side of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 mounted on the frame substrate holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1181a is formed. Thus, as shown in FIG. 143, the delivery control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed on the delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the cover 1133 of the power supply board box 1103. In the state of being mounted over the mounting area, the dispensing control board box 1105 is housed in the mounting area and fixed so as not to move in the lateral direction or in the vertical direction. Therefore, the cover body 1250 is not opened by the contact lower step surface 1181a which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the dispensing control substrate box 1105 being abutted and covered by the contact lower side wall 1256 of the cover body 1250. As long as the payout control board box 1105 can not be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 139, in the cover body 1250 of this example, guide protrusions 1259 for guiding the opening and closing are protruded inward at the top and bottom of the through hole 1254 when the cover body 1250 is closed. There is. The guide projection 1259 is disposed at a position corresponding to the guide holes 569 b formed on the upper and lower sides of the locking projecting wedge piece 570 formed in the locking wall 569 on the main body frame 3 side, and when the cover body 1250 is closed. The guide protrusion 12159 is inserted into the guide hole 569b, whereby the cover 1250 is positioned at a predetermined position.

  In the closed state, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover 1250 has the rear end at the rear end of the winning ball tank 720 (in the case of this embodiment, the rear wall of the discharge port 730), and the tank rail When viewed from the side of the rear end wall of the member 740, it is in the same vertical plane. For this reason, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower side of the back side and the shape is extremely refreshing, so the entire thickness is uniform when transporting the pachinko machine 1 Because it is easy to grasp, it is easy to carry out loading and superposition work, and when actually installed on the island stand of the game arcade, it protrudes from the back of the pachinko machine of the other party on the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in a backward direction It can be installed extremely smoothly without worrying about the wiring and the like.

  As mentioned above, although the cover body 1250 which concerns on this example embodiment has been demonstrated, when this cover body 1250 closes the cover body 1250 with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall which is the lower side of the cover body 1300. Since 1256 contacts and covers the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the dispensing control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, the dispensing control board box 1105 is used as a frame unless the cover body 1250 is opened. It can not be removed from the substrate holder 1101. And since the cover body 1250 is locked by a padlock or the like held by the locking protruding hook piece 570 which penetrates the through hole 1254, it is needless to say that the main control board box 624 covered by the cover body 1250 is cheating. It is also possible to prevent a fraudulent act on the dispensing control board box 1105 which is not covered by the cover 1250.

  Further, even when the cover 1250 is closed and locked with a padlock or the like, since the connection operation opening 1255 is opened in the cover 1250, the test terminals 624b and 624c are used as inspection devices. The RAM clear switch 624 a can be operated when connecting or when software or the like runs away and recovers. Then, since an upright wall 1257 and a contact protrusion 1258 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1255 so that a gap does not occur between the connection operation opening 1255 and the main control board box 624, the connection operation opening 1255 By inserting a piano wire or the like, it is possible to prevent an unfair act on the back of the game board 4.

  Further, the cover 1250 is in the same vertical plane when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 in the closed state, When viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part on the back side to the lower part, and the shape is extremely refreshing, and the entire thickness is uniform and easy to grasp when transporting the pachinko machine 1 , Easy loading and stacking work, and also when actually installed on the island of the game arcade, on the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the back-to-back direction, the wiring etc. that project to the back of the other pachinko machine It can be installed extremely smoothly without concern.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 154. FIG. FIG. 148 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the game board as seen obliquely from the front right, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the game board as seen obliquely from the left front. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of the game board obliquely viewed from the rear, and FIG. 152 is a cross-sectional view of the game board cut in the horizontal direction substantially at the center in the vertical direction. Furthermore, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear FIG. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 156 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the rear.

  As shown, the gaming board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and the player operates the operation handle portion 461 to play the game ball (simply A frame-shaped front component 601 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which the ball is hit and a transparent plate-shaped game arranged to close the game area 605 on the rear side of the front component 601 A panel 600, a frame-shaped panel holder 630 which covers the outer periphery of the game panel 600 and detachably holds the game panel 600 from the front side, and an out port outside the game area 605 A function display unit 640 disposed below the front component 601 on the right side of 606 and a function display sticker 64 affixed to the front of the function display unit 640 It has a, and.

  The game board 4 is viewed from the player side on the back side of the back unit 3000, which is mainly disposed on the front side of the game panel 600, the back unit 3000 disposed on the back side of the game panel 600, and the back unit 3000. And a liquid crystal display device 1400 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is disposed above the out port 606 substantially at the center in the horizontal direction in the game area 605 and is supported by the front of the game panel 600, and the game area 605 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. Side decorative members 2200 arranged along the outer periphery of the game panel 600 supported by the front of the game panel 600, and gate members 2300 arranged at the left side slightly upward from the vertical center in the game area 605 and supported by the front of the game panel 600 And a frame-shaped center character 2400 which is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 605 and supported by the game panel 600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 includes a frame-like back front unit 3000a attached to the back side of the panel holder 630, and a back back unit 3000b attached to the back side of the back front unit 3000a. The liquid crystal display device 1400 is detachably attached to the back surface of the back unit 3000b, and the effect image displayed through the frame of the back unit 3000a and the center character 2400 is viewed from the player side. It is made visible.

  The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of this example is divided into the front and back, and is divided into a front back unit 3000a and a back rear unit 3000b. A back front unit 3000a in the back unit 3000 is a back front upper decoration member 3020, a back front left portion decoration member 3030, and a back front lower decoration that decorates the rear side of the transparent game panel 600 outside the center character 2400. The member 3040 is mainly provided. The back unit 3000 b in the back unit 3000 is an upper movable decoration unit 3200, a side movable decoration unit 3400, and a lower movable decoration unit 3600 disposed on the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the rear side of the game panel 600. Mainly The liquid crystal display device 1400 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box main body 3100 which constitutes the back box 621 in the back rear unit 3000b.

  Furthermore, to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the game board 4, a peripheral substrate box 622 accommodating a peripheral substrate 4010 consisting of a peripheral control substrate 4140 and a liquid crystal control substrate 4150 will be described later in detail. An inverter board box 1410 accommodating an inverter board 1411 for supplying power is provided.

[2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 157 is a front perspective view of the attacker unit, and FIG. 158 is a rear perspective view of the attacker unit. Further, FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view in which the attacker unit is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 160 is a perspective view showing each opening / closing drive mechanism in the attacker unit.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the front unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side to the opening 600e formed at the lower part in the middle in the left-right direction of the game panel 600, It is fixed. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of receiving openings (prize openings) in which the game balls driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, the attacking unit 2100 is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction. The first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102 disposed below the first start opening 2101, and the second start opening 2102 disposed below the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102 A section-shaped large winning opening 2103 greatly extending in the left-right direction, and a total of four general winning openings 2104 disposed slightly on the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103 are provided.

  The upper side of the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open, and game balls can be always accepted (winning). On the other hand, the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101 has a pair of vane-shaped movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on the left and right sides of the second start port 2102 as illustrated. Thus, the space between the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2101 is closed, and the gaming ball can not be received by the second starting opening 2102 in the illustrated state. The lower end sides of the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start opening 2102 are pivotally supported rotatably, and the upper end sides are pivoted away from each other to move the game ball to the second start opening 2102 Is ready to be accepted. That is, the second start opening 2102 is a variable winning opening due to the pair of movable pieces 2105.

  Further, the winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2106 which can close the opening. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2106 is pivotally supported, and in the substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive the game ball, and the upper side moves forward When it is turned, the special winning opening 2103 can be opened to make it possible to receive the game ball. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening and closing member 2106.

  To further detail the attacker unit 2100 of this example, as shown in FIG. 159, it is attached to the front of the game panel 600 and has a first start opening 2101 and a big winning opening 2103 at the left and right center. And a plate-like base plate 2110 capable of forming a general winning opening 2104 and a pair of movable pieces 2105 attached to the lower front surface of the first starting port 2101 in the base plate 2110 so as to rotatably support the second A central receiving member 2111 forming a starting opening 2102 and opened at the upper and rear sides, and four side supports attached so as to form a general winning opening 2104 at a predetermined position on the front surface of the base plate 2110 Member 2112, a translucent plate-like base plate lens member 2113 attached to the front of the base plate 2110 below the left and right side receiving members 2112, and a base plate Attacher-side decorative substrate 2114 disposed on the rear side of the frame member 2113 and mounted with LEDs 2114a capable of emitting light of a predetermined color on the front surface, and a substrate cover 2115 attached to the rear surface of the cover plate 2110 covering the rear side of the attacker-side decorative substrate 2114 And an open / close member 2106 which is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 and pivotally supports the opening / closing member 2106 for opening / closing the big winning opening 2103, and which rotates the pair of movable pieces 2105 and the opening / closing member 2106; And have.

  As shown in the figure, a pair of movable pieces 2105 in the attacker unit 2100 have an axial hole 2105a penetrating in the front-rear direction near the lower end, and an operating collar 2105b eccentrically with the axial hole 2105a and extending rearward from the rear surface Is equipped. Further, the opening / closing member 2106 is provided with a shaft portion 2106a formed at the left and right ends, an operation collar portion 2106b eccentric to the shaft portion 2106a and projecting leftward from the left end in front view, and from the left and right ends of the front lower portion And a stopper 2106 c that regulates the rotational position of the protruding opening / closing member 2106 in the opening direction.

  The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and a relief-like decoration is provided on the surface. The base plate 2110 has an opening 2110 a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second start port 2102. Further, the base plate 2110 is provided with a hook portion 2110a extended rearward capable of guiding the game ball at a position corresponding to the first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102, the large winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104. ing.

  The central receiving member 2110 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2110 has a relief-like decoration on the front surface and is formed of a low light transmitting member. The central receiving member 2110 includes a pair of shaft portions 2111 a extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at an interval wider than the left and right width of the opening 2110 a in the base plate 2110. By inserting the movable piece 2105 into the shaft hole 2105a, the movable piece 2105 can be pivotally supported.

  Further, the side receiving member 2112 of the attacker unit 2100 has a relief-like decoration on the front surface and is formed of a member having low light transmittance. Furthermore, the base plate lens member 2113 of the attacker unit 2100 is provided with an arabesque relief and is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface only in the arabesque portion. In addition, as shown in FIG. 186, the site | part in which the plating layer in the baseplate lens member 2113 was equipped was formed so that it might be applied to LED2114a mounted in the attachment side decoration board 2114 by front view, and a part of LED2114a Is coming from the player side.

  The attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 transmits a drive of the start port solenoid 2121 to the movable piece 2105 and a start port solenoid 2121 for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 2105 for opening and closing the second start port 2102. It includes an opening drive transmission member 2122 and a start opening drive mechanism base 2123 that supports the start opening drive transmission member 2122 and the start opening solenoid 2121 and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110.

  The start port solenoid 2121 is capable of advancing and retracting by energization and has a plunger 2121 a biased in a projecting direction by a coil spring (not shown), and a rear side of the second start port 2102 below the first start port 2101. In position, the plunger 2121a is supported by the starting opening drive mechanism base 2123 so as to protrude forward. As shown in the figure, the tip of the plunger 2121a of the start port solenoid 2121 is formed in a disk shape extending in the direction perpendicular to the advancing and retracting direction.

  The left and right ends of the start opening drive transmission member 2122 are pivotally supported by the front end of the start opening drive mechanism base 2123 so as to turn around an axis extending in the left and right direction at a position lower than the plunger 2121a of the start opening solenoid 2121 ing. The start opening drive transmission member 2122 is formed in a plunger insertion portion 2122a into which the disk-like tip of the plunger 2121a is inserted substantially at the center upper side in the left-right direction And a transmission engaging portion 2122b located forward of the pivotal support position. The start opening drive transmission member 2122 is configured such that the rear end of the action flange portion 2105b of the movable piece 2105 is inserted into the substantially C-shaped transmission engagement portion 2122b from the open side thereof.

  In a normal state, the transmission engagement portion 2122b is in a state where the substantially C-shaped open side is positioned lower than the pivotal position (the pair of movable pieces 2105 is erected and the second start port 2102 is closed). It is supposed to be. When the plunger 2121a of the starting port solenoid 2121 is retracted by energizing the starting port solenoid 2121, the open side is positioned above the pivotally supported position, and is inserted into and engaged with the transmission engaging portion 2122b. The action flange portion 2105b of the movable piece 2105 is also raised, and the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are separated from each other (the second start port 2102 is in an open state).

  The start opening drive mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so as to be able to accommodate and support the start opening solenoid 2121 from the front side, and rotates the start opening drive transmission member 2122 at the front end around an axis extending in the left and right direction. It is formed so that it can be pivotally supported. In addition, the starting opening drive mechanism base 2123 and the first guiding portion 2123a that guides the gaming ball having been received by the first starting opening 2101 on the upper surface and circulating the corresponding bowl portion 2110b of the base plate 2110 to the right in front view The second guiding portion (not shown in detail is not shown), which is formed lower than the portion supporting the starting opening solenoid 2121 and is received by the second starting opening 2102 and which circulates the gaming ball distributed through the corresponding hook portion 2110b. ) And.

  In addition, the attacker drive unit 2120 is provided with an attacker solenoid 2124 for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106 for opening and closing the special winning opening 2103, an attacker drive transmission member 2125 for transmitting the drive of the attacker solenoid 2124 to the opening and closing member 2106, and an attacker drive. An attacker drive mechanism base 2126 which supports the transmission member 2125 and the attachment solenoid 2124 and pivotally supports the opening / closing member 2106 and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 below the starting opening drive mechanism base 2123; A second start opening sensor 2127 supported at a predetermined position of the drive mechanism base 2126 and detecting a game ball received by the second start opening 2102 and a second start opening sensor 2127 are supported at different positions and held in the large winning opening 2103 Count to detect the accepted game ball And a winning hole decoration substrate 2129 supported by the lower portion of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and having a plurality of LEDs 2129a mounted on the upper surface, and a start opening solenoid 2121 supported by the upper surface of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126; A second start port sensor 2127 and an attacker unit relay board 2130 for relaying the connection between the count sensor 2128 and the main control board 4100 are provided.

  Like the start port solenoid 2121, the adder solenoid 2124 in the adder drive unit 2120 can be advanced and retracted by energization and has a plunger 2124a biased in the protruding direction by a coil spring (not shown). The attachment solenoid 2124 is attached to the attachment driving mechanism base 2126 such that the plunger 2124 a moves forward and backward in a front view. As illustrated, the tip end of the plunger 2124 a of the attacker solenoid 2124 is formed in a disk shape extending in the direction perpendicular to the advancing and retracting direction.

  Although not shown in detail, the attachment drive transmission member 2125 is pivotally supported by the attachment drive mechanism base 2126 so as to turn around an axis extending forward and backward at a position forward and above the plunger 2124a of the attachment solenoid 2124. It is done. The attachment drive transmission member 2125 includes a shaft 2125a extending in the front-rear direction and axially supported by the attachment driving mechanism base 2126, a plate 2125b fan-shaped (triangularly) extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft 2125a, and a shaft 2125a. The clamping portion 2125c which protrudes backward from the rear surface of the plate portion 2125b at the eccentric position and can hold the disk-shaped tip of the plunger 2124a of the attacker solenoid 2124 is larger than the clamping portion 2125c with respect to the shaft portion 2125a. And two engaging pins 2125 d protruding forward from the front surface of the plate portion 2125 b at an eccentric position.

  As shown in the figure, the end of the operating rod portion 2106b of the opening / closing member 2106 pivotally supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 is inserted between the two engagement pins 2125d as illustrated. There is. In the normal state where the plunger 2124a of the attacker solenoid 2124 protrudes due to the biasing force of the coil spring, the two engagement pins 2125d are positioned lower than the shaft portion 2125a, and the upper engagement pin 2125d Is in contact with the action flange portion 2106 b of the opening / closing member 2106 to prevent the action flange portion 2106 b from moving upward, and the opening / closing member 2106 is erected (the big winning opening 2103 is in a closed state). On the other hand, when the attachment solenoid 2124 is energized and the plunger 2124 a is retracted (moves in the right direction in front view), the attachment drive transmission member 2125 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view. The two engagement pins 2125 d also pivot to move upward. As the engaging pin 2125 d is raised, the action flange 2106 b of the opening and closing member 2106 inserted between the two engaging pins 2125 d is also raised, and the upper end of the opening and closing member 2106 is relatively moved forward. It is turned as described above, and the upper end is positioned slightly above horizontal (the big winning opening 2103 is open).

  The attacker drive mechanism base 2126 in the attacker drive unit 2120 is formed in a box shape which is divided into two in the upper and lower sides, and can be configured to be able to support the attacker solenoid 2124, the attacker drive transmission member 2125, etc. inside thereof. . As shown in the figure, the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 2126a corresponding to the large winning opening 2103 of the base plate 2110 at the front, and the gaming ball received to the large winning opening 2103 is It enters into the inside through the opening 2126a. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the rear bottom surface of the opening 2126a in the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 is inclined to be lower toward the right rear in front view, and the large winning opening penetrating downward to the bottommost portion A passage is formed, and a count sensor 2128 is supported so that gaming balls circulating in the winning opening passage can be detected. In addition, the attacking drive base 2126 has a starting opening passage penetrating vertically in a substantially central rear portion in the left-right direction, and the second starting opening sensor can detect the game ball flowing in the starting opening passage. It supports 2127.

  In this example, the substrate cover 2115, the start opening drive mechanism base 2123, and the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the light is driven by the light from the LED 2129a of the big winning hole decoration substrate 2129. The interior of the mechanism base 2126 can be illuminated and decorated.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 can always receive the game ball. On the other hand, in the second starting opening 2102, a pair of movable pieces are activated by the starting opening solenoid 2121 being energized according to the result of the normal lottery that the gaming ball passes through the gate 2302 in the gate member 2300 described later. 2105 is expanded and can be received. In addition, in the special winning opening 2103, according to the special lottery result which is drawn by accepting the game ball to the 1st starting opening 2101 and the 2nd starting opening 2102 (starting winning combination) (the special drawing result is “big hit” or At the time of "small hit", the open / close member 2106 can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern so that it can be received by energizing the attachment solenoid 2124.

  In addition, in the attacker unit 2100, the gaming balls received into the first starting opening 2101 are sent to the right first ball passage 3051 of the right ball guiding member 3050 in the back unit 3000a in the back unit 3000 described later. ing. In addition, the gaming ball received into the second start opening 2102 is discharged downward after being detected by the second start opening sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. Furthermore, the gaming ball received to the special winning opening is discharged downward after being detected by the count sensor 2128 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. Further, the gaming ball received to the general winning opening 2104 is the second right ball passage 3052 of the right ball passage member 3050 in the back front unit 3000a of the back unit 3000 and the left first ball passage of the left ball passage member 3060 described later. The passage 3061 is sent to the left second ball passage 3062 and the like.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2124 is disposed such that the advancing and retracting direction of the plunger 2124 a is in the left and right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2124 is disposed in a position as close as possible to the opening and closing member 2106. Therefore, the dimension in the anteroposterior direction of the attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% as compared with the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured more widely. .

[2-2. Side decoration member]
Subsequently, the side decoration member 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 155, FIG. 156, and the like. The side decoration member 2200 in the game board 4 is located on the lower side of the game panel 600 from the center in the left-right direction, with respect to the opening 600e formed on the left side of the opening 600e in which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed After being inserted, it is fixed to the front of the game panel 600 and is formed along the inner periphery of the game area 605.

  The side decoration member 2200 is attached to the front of the game panel 600 and inserted into the body member 2202 having an arc-shaped opening frame 2202 a substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 605 and inserted into the opening frame 2202 a in the body member 2202 Transparent plate-like side lens member 2204, a lower left circular arc decorative substrate 2206 (see FIG. 186) disposed on the rear side of the side lens member 2204 and having a plurality of LEDs 2206a mounted on the front, and a lower left circular arc decorative substrate 2206 And a substrate cover 2208 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 2202 so as to cover from the side.

  As shown in the figure, the main body member 2202 in the side decoration member 2200 is provided with a shelf 2202b inclined at the upper end thereof so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the right than the front surface of the game panel 600. The game balls having flowed down on the shelf 2202 b can be guided to the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 605. The main body member 2202 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  Further, the side lens member 2204 in the side decoration member 2200 is provided with an arabesque-shaped relief, and a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface only at the area of the arabesque-shaped portion is provided. Thus, an arc-shaped lower left arc decoration portion 2205 is formed. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the portion of the side lens member 2204 provided with the plated layer is formed to cover the LED 2206a mounted on the lower left arc decorative substrate 2206 in a front view, and a part of the LED 2206a Is from the player side (see FIG. 186).

[2-3. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The gate member 2300 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into an opening 600e formed on the left side of the transparent game panel 600 at the left side and slightly above the center in the vertical direction, It is fixed to the front of the game panel 600. The gate member 2200 has a gate 2302 having a width allowing only one game ball to pass, and the gate sensor 2304 disposed in the gate 2302 can detect the game ball passed through the gate 2302 It is supposed to be.

  The gate member 2300 of this example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction as compared with the conventional gate member, and the portion on the rear side of the front surface of the gaming panel 600 is the thickness of the gaming panel 600 It is designed to fit inside.

[2-4. Center feature]
Subsequently, the center prize 2400 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view seen obliquely from the front with the back plate of the center part removed. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view seen obliquely from behind with the back plate of the center part removed. The center character 2400 of the present example is fixed to the front of the game panel 600 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600 e which is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent game panel 600. The outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball between the outer periphery of the game area 605 and the outer periphery of the right side of the front view as shown in the figure. The outer circumferential surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line hanging down so as to form an area of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game area 605 while being formed in an arc shape so as to form a gap. .

  The center product 2400 is a thin plate-like frame-shaped flange portion 2401 that abuts the front surface of the game panel 600, and an insertion wall portion extending from the flange portion 2401 into the opening 600e of the game panel 600. It mainly includes a portion 2402 and a front wall portion 2403 projecting forward from the flange portion 2401. On the front wall portion 2403 of the center character 2400, an upper shelf portion 2404 is formed on the left side from the substantially central position in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side so as to become lower toward the left direction. A game ball thrown into the upper part in the area 605 is made to flow down through the left side of the center character 2400 when flowing down to the upper shelf portion 2404, and a game which has flowed down (entered) to the right than the upper shelf portion 2404 The ball is designed to flow down to the lower part of the game area 605 at a stretch through the right side of the center character 2400. In other words, when the game ball is hit so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf portion 2404 in the center character 2400, the chances of enjoying the flow of the game ball are reduced, so the game ball is strongly hit. It is possible to adjust the size of the game as appropriate, and to maintain tension and prevent the player from becoming a random game.

  In addition, the center character 2400 has entered the warp entrance 2405 (see FIG. 150) and the warp entrance 2405 in which the game balls flowing down the game area 605 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion 2403 The warp outlet 2406 for releasing the ball into the frame and the gaming ball released from the warp outlet 2406 are rolled in the left and right direction and then released into the upper game area 605 of the attacker unit 2100 to lower the upper surface of the insertion wall 2402 And a stage 2410 formed on the main body. The stage 2410 in the center product 2400 is disposed on the front side of the first stage 2411 to which the gaming ball discharged from the warp outlet 2406 is supplied, and on the front side of the first stage 2411 and supplied with the gaming ball from the first stage 2411 And a second stage 2412 capable of releasing game balls into the game area 605.

  The first stage 2411 and the second stage 2412 are formed in a curved surface such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered, and the gaming ball is released (refluxed) into the game area 605 from the approximate center of the stage 2410 Is accepted (winning) in the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 with high probability.

  The center product 2400 is attached to the rear end of the insertion wall portion 2402 and includes a transparent plate-like back plate 2407 that closes most of the inside of the frame that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The back plate 2407 can prevent the game balls supplied on the stage 2410 from dropping off to the rear of the stage 2410 to cause a problem.

  Furthermore, the center character 2400 is disposed on the right side of the front wall portion 2403 at the right side in a front view, at the upper end of the arc-shaped right arc decorative portion 2420 formed along the inner periphery of the game area 605 and the upper end of the right arc decorative portion 2420 Circular right circular decorative portion 2421, plural star-shaped decorative portions 2422 arranged at predetermined positions of the center character 2400, and dotted decorative portions 2423 arranged in a plurality of rows along the inside of the right arc decorative portion 2420 (Refer to FIG. 150) and the right logo decoration 2424 having a rectangular outer shape substantially at the center in the vertical direction on the inner side (front view left) of the right arc decoration 2420 and the right logo decoration disposed at the center top in the horizontal direction It mainly has an upper middle logo decoration 2425 about half the size of the part 2424.

  As shown in the figure, the right arc decoration portion 2420 has an arabic decoration in an arc-like frame, and is formed in a state in which a space between the frame and the arabesque pattern is missing in the front-rear direction. The surface of the right arc decoration portion 2420 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster. In addition, the right circular decorative portion 2421 includes a circular central portion that bulges forward and has a translucent property, and an outer extension portion that extends in a fan shape from the outer periphery of the central portion and on which a plated layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface. ing. Furthermore, the star-shaped decorative portion 2422 has an outer shape in which the inner shape is opposite to that of the small star whose outer shape is a dodecagon of star-shaped outer shape and the inner shape is formed into a polygonal pyramid from the top of the outer shape It has a configuration that has about three times the size of the dwarf star that protrudes forward) and has five dwarfs circumferentially arranged in front of the big star, and a plated layer with metallic luster on the entire surface is It is equipped.

  The dotted decorative portion 2423 has a front end formed of a transparent synthetic resin in a hemispherical shape, and is formed so that the player looks like a bullet-shaped LED. In addition, the right logo decoration portion 2424 is formed in a rectangular frame in a state in which a predetermined logo has translucency. Furthermore, the upper and lower logo decoration portion 2425 has a base on which a small five-pointed star is arranged at each vertex of a predetermined size of the five-pointed star, and a logo frame arranged on the front of the base and having a substantially square outline. Plated with a logo part of a predetermined shape placed in the logo frame, and the five small stars of the base and the logo part are white, and plated with metallic luster on the surface of other parts Layers are provided.

  The center character 2400 is disposed on the rear side of the right circular decorative portion 2420 and on the rear side of the right circular decorative portion 2421 and on the front side thereof. A right circular decorative substrate 2432 on which the LEDs 2432a are mounted, and a right logo decorative substrate 2434 (see FIG. 186) disposed on the rear side of the right logo decoration 2424 and on the front surface of which a plurality of LEDs 2434a are mounted. As illustrated, the LED 2430a mounted on the right arc decoration substrate 2430 is arranged so that a part thereof is covered with the arabesque pattern in the right arc decoration 2420 in a front view, and a part of the LED 2430a Is coming from the player side.

  The center character article 2400 of this example can emit light and decorate the right arc decoration portion 2420 in an arc shape by emitting the LED 2430a of the right arc decoration substrate 2430 in appropriate color, and at the same time, emits light at the point decoration portion 2423. It can be decorated. Further, by making the LEDs 2432a of the right circular decorative substrate 2432 emit light in an appropriate color, it is possible to make the right circular decorative portion emit light and decorate. Furthermore, the light emitting decoration of the right logo decoration part 2424 can be performed by making the LED 2434 a of the right logo decoration substrate 2434 emit light in an appropriate color.

  Although this center character 2400 is not shown in detail, the surface of the flange portion 2401 and the front wall portion 2403 is provided with a plated layer having metallic luster, and the right circular arc decorative portion 2420, right circular decorative portion A light reflectance is high by the plating layer having a metallic luster, together with the extended part of 2421, the star-shaped decoration part 2422, the right logo decoration part 2424 and the like, and the whole is brightly sparkling. In particular, in the star-shaped decorative portion 2422, a plurality of polygon cones of various sizes are formed on the surface (front surface), and incident light can be reflected like glitter like a gem.

  In addition, in the center product 2400, the insertion wall portion 2402 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin including the stage 2410, and the lower movable decorative unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 disposed behind the lower side through the stage 2410 can be seen It is supposed to be. In addition, the right logo movable ornament 3230, the left logo movable ornament 3235 and the liquid crystal display 1400 of the upper movable ornament unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the inside of the center character 2400 frame from the player side It looks good.

[2-5. Back front unit]
Next, the detailed configuration of the back unit 3000a of the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 163 is a front perspective view of the back front unit in the back unit, and FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the back front unit. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back front unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the back front unit disassembled into main members and viewed later.

  A back front unit 3000a in the back unit 3000 of this example forms a back box 621 together with a back box main body 3100 in a back front unit 3000b to be described later, and closes the front end opening of the back box main body 3100 and holds the game panel 600. A back box front plate 3010 attached to the back side of the holder 630 and having a rectangular outer shape and formed in a frame shape, a back front upper decorative member 3020 attached to the front top of the back box front plate 3010, and a back box front plate 3010 The back front left part decoration member 3030 attached to the front left side of the back, the back front lower decoration member 3040 attached to the front lower part of the back box front plate 3010, and the attacking unit 2100 disposed on the right side of the back front lower decoration member 3040 Right ball receiving and guiding downward the gaming ball received to the first starting opening 2101 and the two general winning openings 2104 on the right side A guiding member 3050, a left ball guiding member 3060 disposed on the left side of the lower back decorative member 3040 and receiving and guiding the gaming balls received to the two general winning openings 2104 on the left side of the attachment unit 2100; And a plurality of star-shaped decorative members 3070 attached near the front upper right corner of the front plate 3010 and configured the same as the star-shaped decorative portion 2422 of the center piece 2400.

  The back box front plate 3010 in the back front unit 3000a is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in the drawing, has an opening 3011 having a substantially rectangular outer shape and having a predetermined shape and which largely penetrates in the front and back direction. The frame-like main body wall 3012, the outer wall 3013 extending forward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body wall 3012, and the opening 3011 on the upper side from a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction An inner wall 3014 that extends short from the front of the main body wall 3012 to a short distance from the front of the main body wall 3012 along the inner peripheral edge and slightly below the center, and a flange holder extending outward from the front end of the outer wall 3012 And a fixing portion 621 a for attachment to the housing 630.

  The opening 3011 of the back box front plate 3010 is formed at a position eccentric to the upper side with respect to the substantially rectangular main body wall 3012 as shown in the figure, and the lower front surface of the frame main body wall 3012 Is wider than the upper front surface. The inner wall portion 3014 is formed in an arc shape substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 605 on the left and right sides, and is formed in an arc shape in which the center in the left and right direction on the lower side bulges upward. Although detailed description is omitted, between the outer wall 3013 and the inner wall 3014 in the main body wall 3012, the back front upper decoration member 3020, the back front left part decoration member 3030, the back front lower decoration member 3040, Mounting bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the right-ball guiding member 3050, the left-ball guiding member 3060, the star-shaped decorative member 3070, the back box main body 3100 and the like in the back rear unit 3000b are formed at appropriate positions.

  In addition, the upper back of the upper front decoration member 3020 in the back front unit 3000a is formed in an arc shape whose upper end is substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 605 and is horizontally long, Covers the outer circumference of the upper arc decoration 3021 having a smaller curvature than the upper left decoration 3022 disposed on the left side of the upper arc decoration 3021 and the upper left decoration 3022 and the upper arc decoration 3021. A plurality of LED 3024a (see FIG. 186) are arranged in the rear of the upper arc decoration 3021, and are arranged behind the upper arc decoration 3021 in the same shape as the star decoration 2422 in the center combination 2400. It is arranged on the lower side of the mounted upper arc decoration board 3024, the upper arc decoration board 3024, and the rear side of the star-shaped decoration 3023, and light can be emitted downward to the lower side. A plurality of LED3025a (see Figure 186) an upper decorative substrate 3025 mounted is provided with a.

  The upper arc decorative portion 3021 of the back front upper decorative member 3020 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and has an arabesque-like decoration in an arc-like frame and between the frame and the arabesque pattern Is formed in a state of being removed in the front-rear direction. The upper circular arc decoration substrate 3024 arranged on the rear side of the upper circular arc decoration portion 3021 is arranged such that each of the LEDs 3024 a partially overlaps the arabesque pattern of the upper circular arc decoration portion 3021 in a front view. Is coming from the player side. The upper circular arc decoration portion 3021 can be decorated to emit light by emitting light of the LEDs 3024 a of the upper circular arc decoration substrate 3024 with appropriate colors.

  Also, the upper left logo decoration 3022 of the back front upper decoration member 3020 is a base having a small five-pointed star arranged at each vertex of a predetermined size of the five-pointed star, and an outer shape arranged on the front of the base It has a substantially square logo frame and a logo portion of a predetermined shape arranged in the logo frame, and the five small stars of the base and the logo portion are white, and the surface of the other part Is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster. The upper left logo decoration 3022 is approximately half the size of the right logo decoration 2424 in the center character 2400. In addition, the back front upper decoration member 3020 is provided with a plated layer having metallic luster also on the surface of the star-shaped decoration portion 3023. Furthermore, by making the LEDs 3025a of the upper decorative substrate 3025 emit light in appropriate colors, the stage in the upper operating decorative unit 3200, the lower movable decorative unit 3600, etc. of the back rear unit 3000b disposed on the lower side and the center character 2400 2410 and the like can be decorated to emit light.

  The back front left portion decorative member 3030 in the back front unit 3000a is formed along the inner periphery of the game area 605 and is continuous with the lower left arc decorative portion 2205 of the side decoration member 2200 in the front unit 2000 in front view Formed arc-shaped upper left arc decorative portion 3031 formed, circular left circular decorative portion 3032 arranged at upper end of upper left arc decorative portion 3031, and inner side (right side in front view) of upper left arc decorative portion 3031 A plurality of star-shaped decorative portions 3034 are arranged continuously from the inside of the upper left arc decorative portion 3031 to the left end of the back front upper decorative member 3020 and the rectangular shape of the left logo decorative portion 3033 and the upper left arc decorative portion 3031. And an upper left arc having a plurality of LEDs 3035a (see FIG. 186) mounted in the shape of an arc on the front side of the upper left arc decoration portion 3031. A decorative substrate 3035, and a, a left circular decorative substrate 3036 LED3036a (see Figure 186) is mounted to the front is disposed on the rear side of the left circular decorative 3032.

  The upper left arc decorative portion 3031 of the back front left portion decorative member 3030 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and has an arabesque-like decoration in an arc-like frame and between the frame and the arabesque pattern Is formed in a state of being removed in the front-rear direction. The upper left arc decorative substrate 3035 disposed on the rear side of the upper left arc decorative portion 3031 is arranged such that each LED 3035 a partially covers the arabesque pattern in the upper left arc decorative portion 3031 in a front view, and a part of the LED 3035 a Is coming from the player side. By making the LEDs 3035a of the upper left arc decorative substrate 3035 emit light in an appropriate color, the upper left arc decorative portion 3021 can be decorated to emit light. The upper left arc decorative portion 3031 is outside the inner wall 3014 (between the outer wall 3013 and the inner wall 3014 so that the inner side (right side in front view) substantially contacts the inner wall 3014 of the back box front plate 3010. Is located in).

  The left circular decorative portion 3032 of the back front left decorative member 3030 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, fanned from the outer periphery of the circular central portion bulging forward and having a translucent property, and the central portion The diameter of the central portion of the circular shape is smaller than the diameter of the right circular decorative portion 2421 of the center character 2400. A left circular decorative substrate 3036 is disposed on the rear side of the left circular decorative portion 3032, and the left circular decorative portion 3032 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting the LEDs 3036 a of the left circular decorative substrate 3036. It can be done.

  Also, the left logo decoration portion 3033 of the back front left decoration member 3030 is, like the upper left logo decoration portion 3022 of the back front upper decoration member 3020, a small five-pointed star at each vertex in the five-point star of a predetermined size And a logo frame of a substantially square shape, and a logo portion of a predetermined shape disposed within the logo frame, and the base is five small. The star and the logo are white, and the surface of the other part is provided with a plated layer with metallic luster. The left logo decoration portion 3033 has substantially the same size as the upper left logo decoration portion 3022.

  Furthermore, the star-shaped decorative portion 3034 of the back front left-hand decorative member 3030, like the star-shaped decorative portion 2422 of the center character 2400, has an outer shape of a decagon with a star shape and an inner shape extending from the top to the center back And a dwarf that has an inner shape that protrudes in the opposite direction (forward) from the dwarf and has about three times the dwarf of the dwarf, and five dwarfs are placed in front of the big star. It is arranged in a circumferential shape, and a plated layer having metallic luster is provided on the entire surface.

  The lower rear decorative member 3040 of the lower rear unit 3000a is a semicircular lower arc which bulges upward to substantially contact the lower side of the arc-shaped portion formed on the lower side of the inner wall 3014 of the rear box front plate 3010 A decorative portion 3041, a semicircular disc-shaped lower arc decorative portion 3042 for closing the inside of the semicircular arc of the lower arc decorative portion 3041, and a plurality of LEDs 3043 a arranged on the front side of the lower arc decorative portion 3041 (FIG. 186 A lower circular arc decorative substrate 3043 mounted in an arc shape (see), and a magnetic detection sensor 3044 attached to the rear side of the lower circular arc inner decoration 3042 and capable of detecting a predetermined magnetic field. The lower rear decorative member 3040 is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of the attacker unit 2100 in a front view (see FIG. 148 and the like).

  The lower arc decoration portion 3041 of the back front lower decoration member 3040 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and has an arabesque decoration in an arc-like frame and between the frame and the arabesque pattern Is formed in a state of being removed in the front-rear direction. In the lower arc decoration substrate 3043 disposed on the rear side of the lower arc decoration portion 3040, each LED 3043a is arranged so that a part of the arabesque pattern in the lower arc decoration portion 3041 is covered in front view, and a part of the LED 3043a Is coming from the player side. The lower circular arc decoration portion 3041 can be lighted and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs 3043 a of the lower circular arc decoration substrate 3043 with colors.

  The lower arc inner decoration portion 3042 of the back front lower decoration member 3040 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface as illustrated, and radially extending bar-like reliefs are arranged in a circumferential direction . The lower arc inner decorative portion 3042 has an opening 3042a which has a predetermined shape and which penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center in the left-right direction, and the rear end of the attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 is inserted in the opening 3042a. It is supposed to be In the lower arc inner decorative portion 3042, the radially extending relief portion is a plated layer of a color different from the other.

  The right ball guiding member 3050 in the back front unit 3000a is received by the first starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 600 by the corresponding hook 2110b. The right first ball passage 3051 which receives the game ball guided in the right direction by the guiding part 2123a and discharges it downwards, and the corresponding buttocks received by the two general winning openings 2104 on the right side in a front view of the attacker unit 2100 Each of the game balls guided to the rear side of the game panel 600 by 2110 b is received, and a right second ball passage 3052 is provided which guides and discharges from one place downward.

  A first starting opening sensor 3080 for detecting a game ball received by the first starting opening 2101 is attached to the right ball guiding member 3050 in the vicinity of the upper end of the right first ball passage 3051. In addition, a general winning opening sensor 3081 for detecting gaming balls received by the two general winning openings 2104 disposed on the right side of the attacker unit 2100 near the lower end of the right second ball passage 3052 in the right ball guiding member 3050. Is to be attached.

  The left ball guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000a is received by the general winning opening 2104 on the left center side in the front view of the attacker unit 2100, and the gaming ball guided to the back side of the gaming panel 600 by the corresponding hook 2110b A game that is received by the left first ball passage 3061 that receives and guides downward and is received by the general winning opening 2104 on the left outside in a front view of the attacker unit 2100, and is guided to the back of the game panel 600 by the corresponding hook 2110b. And a left second ball passage 3062 which receives the ball and guides it downward.

  The left ball guiding member 3060 detects the game balls received by the two general winning openings 2104 on the left side in the front view of the attacker unit 2100 near lower ends of the left first ball passage 3061 and the left second ball passage 3062, respectively. A general winning opening sensor 3081 is attached.

  In addition, the star-shaped decorative member 3070 in the back unit 3000a has the same configuration as the above-described star-shaped decorative portions 2422, 3023, and 334, and the like.

  In the back unit 3000a of this example, as shown in FIG. 148 etc., the back front upper decoration member 3020, the back front left portion decoration member 3030, the back front lower decoration member 3040, and the star-shaped decoration member 3070 It is provided so as to be located outside 2100, and can be viewed from the player side through the transparent game panel 600. Further, since the back front upper decoration member 3020, back front left decoration member 3030, back front lower decoration member 3040, and star decoration member 3070 are disposed on the rear side of the transparent game panel 600, the upper arc decoration The substrate 3024, the upper left arc decorative substrate 3035, the left circular decorative substrate 3036, the lower arc decorative substrate 3043 and the like can be lighted and decorated, and light from them is reflected by the transparent game panel 600 and irradiated to the front side As a result, the plating layer provided on the surface can be further reflected to the player side, and a sparkling light emission decoration can be performed.

  In addition, as described above, the star-shaped decorative portions 2422, 2323, 3034 and the star-shaped decorative member 3070 of the back unit 3000a, and the star-shaped decoration portions 3219 and 3241b of the back unit 3000b described later A stellate star whose inner shape is formed in the shape of a polygon pyramid from the top of the outline toward the center back, and a star whose inner shape protrudes in the opposite direction (forward) from the small star and about three times the star , With five small stars arranged circumferentially in front of the large star, and five small decagonal pyramids arranged around the central large decagonal pyramid, with a metallic luster on the surface. It is in the form provided with the plated layer. Accordingly, since the star-shaped decorative portions 2422, 2323, 3304, 3070, 3219, and 3241b have a plurality of reflecting surfaces facing in various directions, there is a surface that reflects light from the outside to the player, It can reflect external light and make it look like a glitter like a mirror ball.

  Then, in the back unit 3000 of this example, the plurality of star-shaped decorative portions 2422, 2323, 3340, 3070, 3219, 3241b are positioned in different directions (different rotation angles with respect to the front-rear direction axis). They are attached at different positions in the front-rear direction so that they partially overlap each other, and glitter and reflection are generated everywhere in the gaming area 605 where the star-shaped decorative parts 2422, 2323, 3303, 4070, 3219, 3241b are arranged. As it is possible to make the decoration of the game board surface that divides the rear end of the game area 605 into a decoration as if it had illuminations, it is also possible to make a decoration with a high sense of depth, the player Be able to attract the interest of

[2-6. Overall configuration of back and rear units
Subsequently, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000b of the back unit 3000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the back unit in the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 168 is a perspective view of the back unit in the back unit as viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG. 169 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into major members and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into major members and viewed obliquely from behind FIG.

  The back unit 3000b in the back unit 3000 of this example forms a back box 621 together with the back box front plate 3010 of the back unit 3000a, and has a box shape open at the front side and a rectangular shape penetrating in the front and rear direction to the back wall 621b. Of the rear box main body 3100 having the opening 621 c, the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 mounted above the opening 621 c in the rear box main body 3100, and the lower side of the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 in the rear box main body 3100 The side movable decoration unit 3400 attached to the left and right sides of the opening 621c, the lower movable decoration unit 3600 attached to the lower side of the opening 621c in the back box main body 3100, and Lamp drive housing the first lamp drive board 3801 and the second lamp drive board 3802 (see FIG. 185) It is mounted on the left side (right side in rear view) of the board box 3804 and the lamp drive board box 3804 and relays the connection between the main control board 4100 and the attacker unit relay board 2130 or the gate sensor 2304 of the attacker unit 2100 and the peripheral control board 4140. And a right relay terminal board 3808 and a left relay terminal board 3810 mounted near the left and right sides of the rear surface of the rear wall 621b of the back box main body 3100.

  As shown in the figure, the back box main body 3100 in the back unit 3000b is formed in a box shape whose front side is opened, and a rectangular opening 621c penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed in the back wall 621b. In the back box main body 3100, two fixing grooves 3102 recessed outward toward the left side (right side in rear view) of the opening 621c on the rear surface of the rear wall 621b, and a lock member attached to the opposite side across the opening 621c The fixed piece 1402 protruding from the left side surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is inserted into the fixed groove 3102, and the fixed piece 1402 on the right side surface is supported by the lock member. The liquid crystal display device 1400 can be detachably attached to the rear side of the back box main body 3100. The liquid crystal display device 1400 attached to the rear side of the back box main body 3100 has its display screen facing from the front side through the opening 621 c.

  In addition, the back box main body 3100 is provided with a terminal plate mount 3104 for supporting the right relay terminal plate 3808 on the right side (left side in rear view) of the opening 621 c in the rear surface of the rear wall 621 b. In the terminal plate mount 3104, a portion to which the right relay terminal plate 3808 is attached is pivoted between a fixed position located in the opening 621c and an open position located outside the opening 621c in a front view. It has become. When attaching and detaching the liquid crystal display device 1400 to and from the back box main body 3100, the terminal plate mount 3104 (the right relay terminal plate 3808) becomes an obstacle by rotating the terminal plate mount 3104 to the open position. While the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be attached and detached without attaching the liquid crystal display device 1400, the terminal board mount 3104 is rotated to a fixed position after the liquid crystal display device 1400 is attached. By positioning at the position of the rear side, the amount of projection to the rear side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the back box main body 3100 is provided with a plate-like back decorative plate 3106 to which a predetermined decoration is applied on the left and right sides and the lower side of the opening 621 c on the front surface of the back wall 621 b. Although the detailed description is omitted, the back box main body 3100 includes a back box front plate 3010, an upper movable decoration unit 3200, a side movable decoration unit 3400, a lower movable decoration unit 3600, a lamp driving board box 3804, Mounting bosses, mounting holes and the like for mounting and fixing the panel relay substrate 3806 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, in this example, the back box main body 3100 is formed of black and non-transparent rigid resin, and viewed from the player side, the upper movable decorative unit 3200, the side movable decorative unit 3400, and the lower portion. The back side of the movable decoration unit 3600 can be darkened to provide an illusion that the depth is greater than the actual depth, and the contrast can be enhanced when light emission decoration is performed, and a light emission decoration having a higher decoration effect can be performed. It can be done.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 185, the lamp drive board box 3804 attached to the rear side of the back box main body 3100 holds the two first lamp drive boards 3801 and the second lamp drive board 3802 so that they face each other. doing.

[2-7. Upper movable decoration unit]
Next, the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 in the back-rear unit 3000b will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 171 is a perspective view of the upper movable decorative body of the back unit in the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the upper movable decorative unit of the back unit in the back unit as viewed obliquely from the rear . FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the upper movable decorative unit disassembled into major members and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective of the upper movable decorative unit into major members and viewed obliquely from behind It is the disassembled perspective view seen. Further, FIG. 175 is a plan view showing a unit base and a slider cover of the upper movable decorative body unit omitted, and FIG. 176 is a front view showing the relationship between the main body unit and the star unit in the upper movable decorative body unit. FIG. 177 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs in the upper movable decorative unit. FIG. 178 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the upper movable decorative body unit.

  The upper movable decorative unit 3200 in the back unit 3000b of this embodiment is a main unit 3210 attached to the upper side of the opening 621c in the back box main body 3100 and extending in the left and right direction, and a main body disposed on the front right of the main unit 3210 The right logo movable decoration 3230 which can be moved in the left and right direction by the unit 3210 and the right logo movement decoration 3230 are arranged on the front left side of the main unit 3210 so as to be movable in the left and right direction by the main unit 3210 A left logo movable decoration 3235 and a star unit 3240 which is disposed between the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 and the main unit 3210 and can be moved up and down by the main unit 3210 are provided.

  The main unit 3210 of the upper movable decorative unit 3200 includes a unit base 3211 extending in the left and right direction, and a pair of logo drive motors attached so that rotation shafts project upward near the left and right ends on the rear side of the unit base 3211. 3212, a logo drive gear 3213 fixed to the rotation shaft of the logo drive motor 3212, and a rack gear 3214a meshing with the logo drive gear 3213 and linearly extending in the left-right direction slide in the left-right direction at the left-right upper part of the unit base 3211 And a slider cover 3215 attached to the upper surface of the unit base 3211 so as to cover the upper side of the slider 3214.

  Also, the main unit 3210 has a pair of star unit elevating drive motors 3216 mounted so that the rotary shaft 3216 a protrudes forward at an intermediate position between the center in the left and right direction and the left and right ends on the rear side of the unit base A lifting arm 3217 fixed to the rotation shaft 3216a of the unit lifting drive motor 3216 and disposed on the front of the unit base 3211 and extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation shaft 3216a, and protruding forward from the tip of the lifting arm 3217 A lifting pin 3218 is attached, and a plurality of star-shaped star-shaped decorations 3219 are attached to the front ends of the unit base 3211 outside the rotation range of the lifting arm 3217.

  Furthermore, the main body unit 3210 is attached to a predetermined position on the top of the unit base 3211 and is mounted on a pair of slide detection sensors 3220 for detecting the slide position of the slider 3214; A pair of elevation detection sensors 3221 for detecting, an upper right relay terminal plate 3222 mounted between a central portion in the horizontal direction on the rear side of the unit base 3211 and star unit elevation drive motors 3216 on the left and right, and an upper left relay And a terminal plate 3223.

  As shown in the figure, the unit base 3211 in the main body unit 3210 includes a vertically elongated box-like storage portion 3211a which extends upward at the center in the left-right direction and whose front side is open, and a star unit described later in the storage portion 3211a A star rotation drive motor 3242 3240 is accommodated so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Further, the unit base 3211 is provided with an elevation stopper 3211b projecting forward on the front side in the vicinity where the star unit elevation drive motor 3216 is supported, and the elevation arm 3217 positioned at the elevation position abuts to turn the elevation arm 3217 It is possible to regulate the end.

  Further, the slider 3214 in the main unit 3210 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a rack gear 3214a that meshes with the logo drive gear 3213 is formed along the rear end side. The slider 3214 is provided with a detection piece 3214 b at the rear end near the center with respect to the unit base 3211, and this detection piece 3214 b is detected by the slide detection sensor 3220. Furthermore, the slider 3214 is provided with a pair of mounting bosses 3214c that project forward at a front end close to the center with respect to the unit base 3211 at a predetermined distance in the left and right direction. And 3230 left logo movable ornaments 3235 can be attached respectively.

  Further, the lifting arm 3217 in the main unit 3210 is fixed to the rotation shaft 3216 a of the star unit lifting drive motor 3216 and supports the lifting pin 3218 at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft 3216 a. Further, as shown in FIG. 176, the lift arm 3217 has a detection piece detected by a lift detection sensor 3221 attached to a front surface of the unit base 3211 at a predetermined position. The detection arm of the lift arm 3217 is brought into contact with the lift stopper 3211 b of the unit base 3211 when the lift arm 3217 is pivoted to the raised position.

  Also, the star-shaped decorative portion 3219 in the main unit 3210 has a decagonal shape with a star-shaped outer shape and an inner shape in the shape of a polygon pyramid from the vertex of the outer shape toward the center back The formed dwarf has an inner shape projecting in the opposite direction (forward) to the dwarf and has about three times the large dwarf of the dwarf, and five dwarfs are circumferentially arranged in front of the big star It has a form, and is provided with a plated layer having metallic luster on the entire surface.

  The right logo movable decorative body 3230 in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 has a three-dimensional external shape and has a relief-like logo portion 3231a and a star-shaped star portion 3231b on the front surface and is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin The main body 3231, a front logo frame 3232 held on the front side of the main body 3231 and having an opening 3232a through which the logo portion 3231a and the star portion 3231b can pass, and a plurality of LEDs 3233a arranged in the main body 3231 and front (FIG. And the substrate cover 3234 that covers the rear side of the right logo decoration substrate 3233 and is attached to the rear surface of the main body 3231.

  Although the main body portion 3231 of the right logo movable decoration 3230 is not shown in detail, the front surface of the logo portion 3231a has a smooth shape, while the rear surface of the logo portion 3231a has a complex surface shape. The logo portion 3231a is a prismatic lens. Thus, light incident on the logo portion 3231a is irregularly refracted and dispersed inside, and looks complex and beautiful iridescent. Moreover, the star part 3231b of the main-body part 3231 is formed in pyramid shape which the center protruded to the front. The body portion 3231 further includes a fixing portion 3231 c extending in a plate shape obliquely upward and rearwardly from the upper rear end, and the fixing portion 3231 c is attached to the mounting boss 3214 c of the slider 3214. .

  Further, the front logo frame 3232 in the right logo movable decoration 3230 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface. Further, the front logo frame 3232 is provided with an upper right logo decoration portion 3232 b in the upper right corner in a front view. Similarly to the upper left logo decoration portion 3022 and the left logo decoration portion 3033 in the back front unit 3000a, the upper right logo decoration portion 3232b has a small five-pointed star at each vertex in the five-point star of a predetermined size, respectively. It has a base placed, a logo frame placed on the front of the base and a substantially square outer shape, and a logo part of a predetermined shape placed in the logo frame, and five small stars of the base The logo portion is white, and a plated layer having a metallic luster is provided on the surface of the other portion. The upper right logo decoration portion 3232 b has substantially the same size as the upper left logo decoration portion 3022 and the left logo decoration portion 3033.

  The right logo movable decoration 3230 of this example can emit light and decorate the logo portion 3231a and the star portion 3231b by appropriately emitting the LEDs 3233a of the right logo decoration substrate 3233 in colors. Although not shown in detail, the main body 3231 is provided with an opaque partition wall that divides the logo portion 3231a and the star portion 3231b, and the logo portion 3231a and the star portion 3231b are separately provided. It can be made to emit light and decorate.

  The left logo movable decorative body 3235 in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 has a three-dimensional external shape with a relief-like logo portion 3236a and a star-shaped star portion 3236b on the front surface and is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin A main body 3236, a front logo frame 3237 held on the front side of the main body 3236 and having an opening 3237a through which the logo portion 3236a and the star portion 3236b can pass, and a plurality of LEDs 3238a arranged in the main body 3236 and front And a substrate cover 3239 which covers the rear side of the left logo decorative substrate 3238 and is attached to the rear surface of the main body 3236.

  Although the main body 3236 of the left logo movable decorative body 3235 is not shown in detail, the front surface of the logo portion 3236a has a smooth shape, while the rear surface of the logo portion 3236a has a complex surface shape. The logo portion 3236a is a prismatic lens. Thus, light incident on the logo portion 3236a is irregularly refracted and dispersed inside, and looks complex and beautiful iridescent. In addition, the star portion 3236b of the main body portion 3236 is formed in the shape of a pyramid whose center protrudes forward. Further, the main body 3236 further includes a fixing portion 3236c extending in a plate shape obliquely upward and rearward from the upper rear end, and the fixing portion 3236c is attached to the mounting boss 3214c of the slider 3214. . Furthermore, the front logo frame 3237 in the left logo movable decoration 3235 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The left logo movable decorative body 3235 in this example can emit light and decorate the logo portion 3236 a and the star portion 3236 b by appropriately emitting the LEDs 3238 a of the left logo decoration substrate 3238 in colors. Although not shown in detail, the main body 3236 is provided with an opaque partition wall which divides the logo portion 3236a and the star portion 3236b, and the logo portion 3236a and the star portion 3236b are separately provided. It can be made to emit light and decorate.

  The star unit 3240 in the upper movable decoration unit 3200 is a star-shaped star unit base 3241 which spreads in the left-right direction, and a star attached to the center upper rear side of the star unit base 3241 in the left-right direction A rotational drive motor 3242, a drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotational shaft of the star rotational drive motor 3242, and a driven gear (generally shown) And a star-shaped rotary decorative body 3245 having a predetermined size and having a shaft portion 3245 a fixed to the shaft center of the driven gear and disposed on the front side of the star unit base 3241, and a star-shaped rotary decorative body 3245 A star-shaped portion having a star portion 3246a of substantially the same size and a plurality of openings 3246b disposed at predetermined positions in the star portion 3246a and penetrating in the front-rear direction A star base 3246 which is disposed between the rolling decoration 3245 and the driven gear and rotatably supports the shaft portion 3245a of the star-shaped rotary decoration 3245 and covers the driven gear and the front side of the driving gear; And a star decoration substrate 3247 (see FIG. 177) disposed between the star portion 3246a and the driven gear at the front side and having a plurality of LEDs 3247a mounted on the front so as to face forward through the opening 3246b of the star base 3246 There is.

  The star unit 3240 is arranged in front of the star unit base 3241, two each on the left and right outside of the star portion 3246a of the star base 3246 and smaller than the star-shaped decorative body 3245. Left and right upper star decoration substrate 3249 mounted on the front side of the unit base 3241 mounted on the back of the unit base 3241 in corresponding positions with the left and right two star decorations 3248 and a plurality of LEDs 3249a (see FIG. 177) And a star rotation detection sensor 3250 that is attached to 3241 and can detect the rotational position of a driven gear that rotates with the star-shaped rotary decoration 32445.

  The star unit base 3241 in the star unit 3240 has a pair of long holes 3241a which are vertically insertable at the upper left and right ends and through which the elevation pins 3218 of the main unit 3210 can be inserted. The star unit 3240 is supported by the main unit 3210 by inserting the left and right elevation pins 3218 of the main unit 3210 into the left and right long holes 3241 a of the star unit base 3241. In this example, a slide bush is rotatably inserted into the lift pin 3218, and the lift pin 3218 is inserted into the long hole 3241a via the slide bush, and the slide bush is inserted. The inside of the long hole 3241a is slid (rolled) in the left and right direction.

  In addition, the star unit base 3241 is provided with a plurality of star-shaped decorative portions 3241 b similar to the star-shaped decorative portion 3219 of the main unit 3210 substantially on the entire front surface. The star unit base 3241 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a plated layer having a metallic luster is applied only to the front surface of a part of the star-shaped decorative portion 3241 b, and the remaining star-shaped decorative portion 3241 b The plating layer is not applied to the portion where the long hole 3241a is formed or the position where the star-shaped decorative body 3248 is attached, and it is in a transparent state.

  The star-shaped rotary decorative body 3245 in the star unit 3240 covers the front of the transparent star base 3245b having a transparent plate-like shape whose outer shape is formed like a five-pointed star and the shaft portion 3245a extends backward from the center and the front of the rotary star base 3245b Thus, a rotating star frame 3245c attached to the rotating star base 3245b and formed in a plurality of frame shapes along the outer periphery of the rotating star base 3245b and having a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface, and the rotating star frame 3245c And a rotating star base 3245b, and has a translucent rotating star lens 3245d. The star-shaped rotary decorative body 3245 can emit light and decorate by emitting light of the LED 3247a of the star decorative substrate 3247 in an appropriate color.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 177, in the star decoration substrate 3247 in the star unit 3240, the LEDs 3247a arranged in the vicinity of each outer vertex formed in a pentagon shape are each inner vertex in the star-shaped decorative ornament 3245 It is disposed outside of the player, and when the star-shaped rotary ornaments 3245 are rotated, their LEDs 3247a are exposed from the player side (see FIG. 178 (D)). As a result, when the star-shaped rotary decoration 3245 is rotated in a state where the LED 3247a is made to emit light, the light from some of the LEDs 3247a can be irradiated directly to the player without passing through the star-shaped rotary decoration 3245. By instantly making the player dazzling, it is possible to enhance the sparkling feeling of the light emission decoration.

  The star-shaped decoration 3248 in the star unit 3240 is smaller than the star-shaped rotating decoration 3245, larger than the star-shaped decoration 3241b of the star unit base 3241 and formed into a five-pointed star shape, and has metallic luster on the surface. And a transparent star-shaped lens portion disposed in the frame portion. The star-shaped decorative portion 3248 can emit light and decorate by emitting light of the LED 3249 a of the upper star decorative substrate 3249 disposed on the rear side in a suitable color.

  The upper movable decoration unit 3200 of this example is attached to the rear side of the star unit base 3241 so that the star rotation drive motor 3242 of the star unit 3240 protrudes rearward as shown in FIG. 173 and FIG. 174 etc. In the assembled state, the star rotation drive motor 3242 protruding backward is accommodated in the accommodation portion 3211a of the unit base 3211 in the main unit 3210 (see FIG. 171).

  In the upper movable decorative unit 3200, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, etc., the right logo movable decorative unit 3230 and the left logo movable decorative unit 3235 are positioned forward of the star unit 3240 in the assembled state. The star unit 3240 can be concealed (not easily seen) from the player side by the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235.

  Subsequently, the movement of the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 will be described. The upper movable decoration unit 3200 in the back unit 3000b of the back unit 3000 of the present example rotates the logo drive motor 3212 disposed on the left and right, respectively, thereby moving the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the right logo 323 The left logo movable decoration 3235 can be moved in the left and right direction. In the upper movable decorative unit 3200, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), the right logo movable decorative unit 3230 and the left logo movable decorative unit 3235 are moved close to each other, that is, moved to the center side in the left-right direction In the state, the star-shaped rotary decoration 3245 centrally disposed by the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 is difficult to see from the player side.

  In addition, when the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 approach each other, the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 become continuous, and the specific illustration is omitted. The respective logos represented by the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 become one logo so that the player can easily recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1 It has become.

  Then, by rotating the left and right logo drive motors 3212 in different directions, the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 move away from each other (outside in the left-right direction), and the center The star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245 placed in can be viewed from the player side (see FIG. 178 (B)). The moving positions of the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 are detected by the slide detection sensor 3220 by detecting the detection pieces 3214 b of the left and right sliders 3214, the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration The left and right positions of the body 3235 can be specified.

  In addition, the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 raises and lowers the star unit 3240 supported via the left and right raising and lowering arms 3217 by rotationally driving the star unit raising and lowering drive motors 3216 arranged on the left and right in different directions. It can be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, when the star unit 3240 is in the raised position, the detection piece 3217a of the lift arm 3217 is in contact with the upper surface of the lift stopper 3211b of the unit base 3211. The lift pins 3218 supported by the lift arm 3217 are in contact with the outer end of the long hole 3241a in the star unit base 3241 via the slide bush. As a result, the downward movement of the raising and lowering pins 3218 is restricted, and the star unit 3240 can be maintained in the rising position at a stopped position even without the driving force of the star unit raising and lowering drive motor 3216. ing.

  From this state, when the star unit elevation drive motor 3216 on the right side in a front view is rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the star unit elevation drive motor 3216 on the left side is rotated clockwise simultaneously at the same speed. The left and right lifting arms 3217 fixed to the rotary shaft 3216 a of the unit lifting drive motor 3216 rotate in different directions. Due to the rotation of the left and right star unit lifting drive motor 3216, the lifting pins 3218 supported by the left and right lifting arms 3217 move in the direction approaching each other while sliding laterally in the long hole 3241a of the star unit base 3241 It moves with it and descends after reaching top dead center. The entire star unit 3240 is moved up and down in accordance with the vertical movement of the elevation pins 3218. Then, when the left and right lifting pins 3218 reach the bottom dead center, the rotational drive of the star unit lifting drive motor 3216 is stopped, and the star unit 3240 is positioned at the lowered position (see FIG. 178C). .

  When the star unit 3240 is positioned at the lowered position, substantially the entire star unit 3240 is positioned on the front of the upper portion of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the star unit 3240 is fully visible to the player (See FIG. 188 etc.). Also, when the star unit 3240 is in the lowered position, as shown in the figure, the left and right star-shaped decorative bodies 3248 are exposed to the player side below the right logo movable decorative body 3230 and the left logo movable decorative body 3235. The light emission decoration by the upper star decoration substrate 3249 can be sufficiently shown to the player.

  In addition, when the star unit 3240 is in the lowered position, the lift pins 3218 are suspended from the rotation shaft 3216a of the star unit lifting drive motor 3216, and no rotational moment acts on the rotation shaft 3216a. The star unit 3240 can be maintained at the lowered position without the driving force of 3216.

  The star unit 3240 can be raised by rotating the star unit elevating drive motor 3216 in the opposite direction to the above to raise the star unit 3240 from the lowered position, and the elevating pins 3218 exceed the top dead center. The drying unit 3240 can be returned to the raised position by rotating slightly until the detection piece 3217a of the raising and lowering arm 3217 contacts the upper surface of the raising and lowering stopper 3211b. The elevation position of the star unit 3240 can be identified by detecting the detection piece 3217a of the elevation arm 3217 by the elevation detection sensor 3220.

  The star unit 3240 in the upper movable decoration unit 3200 can rotate the star-shaped rotary decoration 3245 disposed at the center of the front surface by the star rotation drive motor 3242 (FIG. 178 (D)). reference). The star-shaped rotary decoration 3245 can be rotated either clockwise or counterclockwise by the star rotation drive motor 3242. In addition, the star unit 3240 can rotate the star-shaped rotary decoration 3245 even in the rising position, and also when the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 approach each other in the rising position. But it can be rotated. In addition, by detecting the detection piece (not shown) of the driven gear rotated by the star rotation drive motor 3242 by the star rotation detection sensor 3250, the rotational position of the star-shaped rotary decoration 3245 can be specified. ing.

  As described above, according to the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be decorated within the frame of the center character 2400 and the right logo movable decorative body 3230 moving in the left and right direction The player can be entertained by the different movement and luminous decoration (luminous effect) of the left logo movable decoration 3235, the vertically moving star unit 3240, and the rotating star decoration 3245. This makes it difficult to reduce the interest in the game.

[2-8. Side movable decoration unit]
Next, the side movable decorative unit 3400 in the back unit 3000b will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180. FIG. 179 is a front view showing the side movable decoration unit. Further, FIG. 180 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the side movable decoration unit. The side movable decoration unit 3400 in the back unit 3000b of the present embodiment is attached to the lower side of the upper movable decoration unit 3200 at the left and right upper portions of the opening 621c in the back box main body 3100. Body units 3400 are formed substantially symmetrically.

  As shown in the figure, the side movable decorative unit 3400 has a unit base 3402 attached to the back box main body 3100, and a side drive motor fixed to the rear upper portion of the unit base 3402 so that the rotation axis extends forward. 3404 (see FIGS. 169 and 170), a link member (not shown) fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the side drive motor 3404 and extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation shaft; A side rotation detection sensor 3408 attached to the unit base 3402 for detecting the movement position, a link pin 3410 fixed to the tip of the link member and projecting forward, and a link pin 3410 are slidably inserted and extended in a predetermined direction It has a slit 3412 a and is offset with respect to the unit base 3402 with the rotation shaft of the side drive motor 3404 A decorative body base 3412 that is rotatably supported at a position (see FIG. 170), and a.

  In addition, the side movable decorative unit 3400 covers the front side of the decorative body base 3412 and is disposed in the outer periphery of the large opening 3414a and the large opening 3414a disposed in the vicinity of the tip side opposite to the pivotally supported side and penetrating in the longitudinal direction. A decorative body 3414 having a plurality of small openings 3414b smaller in diameter than the large opening 3414a and a plurality of middle openings 3414c disposed on the base end side pivotally supported at a size between the small openings 3414b and the large opening 3414a; Are arranged at positions corresponding to the large opening 3414a and the small opening 3414b between the lens member 3416 and the decoration base 3412, and a plurality of lenses are inserted in the large opening 3414a, the middle opening 3414c, and the small opening 3414b from the rear side. Side tip decoration substrate 3418 on which the LED 3418a is mounted, the lens member 3416 and the decoration body And a, a side proximal decorative substrate 3420 having a plurality of LED3420a are mounted on the front is arranged in a corresponding position with Nakaguchi 3414c between the scan 3412.

  As shown in the figure, the decoration body 3414 in the movable movable decoration unit 3400 is vertically extended, and a large opening 3414a is formed at the center of the rectangular shaped portion of the lower end (tip). The small openings 3414 b are formed at the four corners of the outer periphery of the large opening 3414 a. Further, the upper end (proximal end) of the decorative body 3414 is provided with two circular portions 3414 d disposed apart from each other on the left and right, and three star portions 3414 e arranged below the circular portion 3414 d, A plurality of center openings 3414 c are arranged between the star portion 3414 e and the large opening 3414 a. As shown in the drawing, the decoration body 3414 has a form that imitates an illumination stand in which the large opening 3414a is regarded as a spotlight. The decorative body 3414 is provided with a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface.

  The side movable decorative body unit 3400 has an axis that allows the decorative body base 3412 to pivot around a circular portion 3414 d arranged on the inner side (the center side of the game area 605) in the decorative body 3414 with respect to the unit base 3402 The main body 3414, the lens member 3416, the side leading end decoration substrate 3418, and the side base end decoration substrate 3420 are pivoted together with the decoration base 3412. As shown in FIG. 180, the pivoting range of the decorative body base 3412 or the like is such that the distal ends of the decorative body 3414 approach each other from a state in which the distal end of the decorative body 3414 is suspended substantially vertically. It is adapted to pivot between an angle range of approximately 90 degrees towards the direction (inward direction). In the state where the tip of the decoration main body 3414 is hanging down, the left and right side movable decoration units 3400 are at the retracted position positioned behind the back front left decoration member 3030 in the center character 2400 and the back front unit 3000a. It is located in a hidden position that is difficult for the player to see (see FIG. 148 etc.).

  Also. The side movable decoration unit 3400 has a large opening 3414a, a middle opening 3414c, and a middle opening 3414c of the decoration body 3414 through the lens member 3416 by appropriately emitting light of the LED 3418a of the side tip decoration substrate 3418 and the LED 3420a of the side base end decoration substrate 3420 in color. The small opening 3414 b can be decorated to emit light. In addition, by making each LED 3418a and 3420a emit light when the decoration body main body 3414 of the side movable decoration unit 3400 is at the retracted position, the right side part in the center character 2400 and the back front left part decoration member 3030 are decorated to emit light from the rear side. It can be done.

[2-9. Lower movable decoration unit]
Subsequently, the lower movable decorative unit 3600 in the back-rear unit 3000b (see FIGS. 167 to 170) will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. FIG. 181 is a rear view showing the lower movable decorative body unit with the unit base cover and the rear lift base removed. FIG. 182 is a perspective view of FIG. 181 as obliquely viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the lower movable decorative body unit. FIG. 184 is an explanatory view showing the arrangement of the LEDs in the lower movable decorative unit.

  As shown in FIG. 148 to FIG. 150 and FIG. 153, FIG. 167 and FIG. 170, the lower movable decorative unit 3600 in the back unit 3000b of this embodiment is the opening at the center of the game panel 600 behind the game panel 600. Between the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the liquid crystal display device 1400 arranged so as to be visible through the portion 600e, in the box-like back unit 3000 (FIG. 153), which is arranged on the game panel 600 and the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is disposed inside the back unit 3000b.

  The lower movable decorative unit 3600 is disposed on the left and right sides of the inside of the back box main body 3100 in the back box main body 3100 (FIG. 167), from the bottom to the center of the back box main body 3100 in the vertical direction. Is disposed between the elevating drive mechanisms 3601 and 3601 (FIGS. 181 and 182) and the left and right elevation driving mechanisms 3601 and 3601, and the lowered position (FIG. 148) by the left and right elevation driving mechanisms 3601 and 3601. 150 etc.) and a rising position (FIG. 191 described later) located in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. And.

  As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the left and right lifting drive mechanisms 3601 and 3601 are mounted near the lower left and right outer lower portions of the opening 621c, and have a box shape with an open rear side and a vertically extending unit base 3602 A plate-shaped unit base cover 3604 (see FIG. 170) closing the rear end opening of the base 3602 and a lower lift drive motor 3606 mounted so that the rotation axis protrudes forward near the lower end of the rear surface of the unit base cover 3604 A first transmission gear 3610 engaged with the drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower lift drive motor 3606 and the drive gear and rotatably supported by the unit base 3602; and a first transmission gear A second transmission gear 3612 rotatably supported on a unit base 3602 in mesh with the 3610, and a second transmission gear 361. A third transmission gear (not shown) integrally fixed to the front side of the front gear, a pinion gear 3616 rotatably supported on the unit base 3602 in mesh with the third transmission gear, and a pinion gear 3616 A lifting rack 3618 having a rack gear 3618a extending in the vertical direction, a cylindrical lifting rail 3620 slidably mounted in the unit base 3602 slidably guiding the lifting rack 3618 in the vertical direction, and a lower end of the unit base cover 3604 And a lower elevation detection sensor 3622 for detecting a detection piece (not shown) attached to the lower end of the elevation rack 3618.

  The lower movable decorative unit 3600 has a predetermined amount between the rear elevating base 3630 and the transparent plate-like rear elevating base 3630 (see FIG. 170) whose left and right ends are attached to the elevating racks 3618 arranged on the left and right. The transparent plate-like front lift base 3632 is attached to the front of the rear lift base 3630 so as to form a gap between them and the center of the front lift base 3632 mounted on the front of the front lift base 3632 in the lateral direction. A lower central decorative member 3634 having an opening 3634a, a transparent lens member 3636 (see FIG. 169 etc.) inserted from the rear side into the circular and star-shaped openings 3634a in the lower central decorative member 3634, and the lens member A lower central decorative substrate 3638 (provided between the 3636 and the front lift base 3632 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 3638a on the front) (See 184), front right wing decoration member 3640 and front left wing decoration member 3642 (see FIG. 169 etc.) disposed on the left and right sides of lower central decoration member 3634 and formed in a wing shape, front right wing decoration member 3640 and front left wing A front right wing decorative substrate 3644 and a front left wing decorative substrate 3646 (see FIG. 184) are disposed between the decorative member 3642 and the front elevating base 3632 and have a plurality of LEDs 3644a, 3646 mounted on the front surface.

  Furthermore, the lower movable decorative unit 3600 includes a wing rotation drive motor 3648 attached to the front lower portion at the center in the left-right direction of the front lift base 3632 so that the rotary shaft protrudes rearward, A rotational power transmission mechanism 3686 is provided which simultaneously transmits the rotational force of the blade rotation drive motor 3648 in the opposite rotational directions to (the rear right wing base 3660 and the rear left wing base 3662).

  The rotational power transmission mechanism 3686 engages with the drive gear 3650 fixed to the rotation shaft of the blade rotation drive motor 3648 and disposed on the rear side of the front lift base 3632 and rotates the drive gear 3650 to the rear side of the front lift base 3632 The left driven gear 3652 and the left driven gear 3652, which are rotatably supported, are rotatably supported by the front lift base 3632 at the right side (left side in rear view) of the left driven gear 3652. A fan-shaped rear right wing drive that is supported by the right driven gear 3554 of the same diameter and the right driven gear 3554 and is supported by the front lift base 3632 and the rear lift base 3630 so as to be integrally rotatable with the longitudinal shaft. The gear 3656 and the rear right wing drive gear 3656 mesh with the left driven gear 3652 on the opposite side across the center of the front lift base 3632 in the left-right direction, Descending is supported by the rear lift base 3630 and base 3632, a left drive gear 3658 after the fan which is rotatably journalled together with the front and rear direction axis, and is composed of.

  Lower movable decorative unit 3600 is common to transparent plate-like rear right wing base 3660 and rear left wing drive gear 3658 which are integrally rotated by a common shaft with rear right wing drive gear 3656 and disposed on the rear side of front elevation base 3632 And fixed to the front side of the rear left wing base 3662 and the rear right wing base 3660 and the rear left wing base 3662 which are integrally rotated by the shaft of the rear and arranged on the rear side of the front elevating base 3632 Between the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 (see FIG. 183C), the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666, and the rear right wing base 3660 and the rear left wing base 3662, respectively. A transparent rear right wing decorative substrate mounted with a plurality of LEDs 3668a, 3670a arranged and capable of emitting light toward the front side And 668 and the rear left decorative substrate 3670 (FIG. 184), and a.

  The front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front right wing decorative substrate 3644 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 the front left wing decorative substrate 3646 correspond to a wing-like front decorative body. The rear right wing base 3660, the rear right wing decorative substrate 3668, the rear right wing decorative member 3664, the rear left wing base 3662, the rear left wing decorative substrate 3670, and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 correspond to wing-like rear movable decorative bodies. The front right wing decorative substrate 3644, the front left wing decorative substrate 3646, the rear right wing decorative substrate 3668 and the rear left wing decorative substrate 3670 correspond to the respective decorative substrates.

  The left and right wing-shaped front decoration bodies and the left and right wing-shaped rear movable decoration bodies are thin plate-like members each having a thin thickness in the front-rear direction, and in the depth direction between the game panel 600 and the liquid crystal display device 1400 It can be arranged so as not to interfere with other structures in a limited arrangement space. Also, as shown in FIG. 181, the gear trains of the rotational power transmission mechanism 3686 are provided between the central portion of the front lifting base 3632 and the central portion of the rear lifting base 3630, and are arranged vertically. As a result, it is configured so as not to be bulky in the depth direction so as to be arrangeable in the arrangement space limited in the depth direction.

[Spring member]
Further, torsion coil springs 3688 and 3688 are externally inserted on the outer periphery of the shaft portion of the rear right wing drive gear 3656 and the outer periphery of the shaft portion of the rear left wing drive gear 3658, respectively. The torsion coil spring 3688 extrapolated to the shaft portion of the rear right wing drive gear 3656 is a hook in which one leg extended from one end of the coil portion is protruded rearward from the center upper portion of the back surface of the front lifting base 3632 The other leg hooked to the stop bar 3689 and extended from the other side of the coil portion is hooked and locked to the rear right wing base 3660.

  Further, the torsion coil spring 3688 extrapolated to the shaft portion of the rear left wing drive gear 3658 has one leg extended from one end of the coil portion latched to the hooking bar 3689 of the front lift base 3632 as well. The other leg extended from the other side is hooked and locked to the rear left wing base 3662 (FIGS. 181 and 182).

  The left and right torsion coil springs 3688 and 3688 are turned by the left and right rear movable decoration when rotating from the lowered position (the concealed position described later) to the raised position (the appearance position described later) An auxiliary biasing force is applied to the torque of the blade rotation drive motor 3648 in the moving direction.

  The lower movable decorative unit 3600 is mounted on the rear side of the front lift base 3632 and has a wing rotation detection sensor 3672 (FIG. 181) for detecting the detection piece 3656a of the right wing drive gear 3656 and the front lift base 3632 And a motor cover 3674 (see FIG. 169) attached to the lower front surface of the lower central decorative member 3634 and covering the front side of the wing rotation drive motor 3648. As described above, the rotational power transmission mechanism 3686 and the blade rotational drive motor 3648 are disposed at the center of the back surface of the front lift base 3632 and the front of the rotational power transmission mechanism 3686 and the rotational drive motor 3648 is the lower central decorative member 3634 and the motor cover Since it is configured to be covered by 3674, it is possible to hide the rotary power drive mechanism 3686 for rotating the rear movable decorative body and the wing rotation drive motor 3648 unnoticeably from the player side, giving the player a sense of discomfort. Absent.

  Lower movable decorative unit 3600 is mounted on the lower relay board cover 3676 which is disposed below the left and right unit bases 3602 and is attached to the lower inside of the back box main body 3100, and to the lower surface of the lower relay terminal board cover. Lower left relay terminal board 3678 and lower left lower relay terminal board 3680, and lower right upper relay terminal board 3682 and lower left upper relay terminal board 3684 attached to the left and right sides near the center on the rear side of front elevation base 3632; ing. These relay terminal boards 3678, 3680, 3682 and 3684 are respectively drive motors 3606 and 3648, detection sensors 3622 and 3672, and decoration substrates 3638, 3644, 3646, 3668, 3670, etc. provided in the lower movable decoration unit 3600. It is for relaying the connection with the peripheral control substrate 4140 such as the first lamp driving substrate 3801 and the second lamp driving substrate 3802.

[Mounting Structure of Back Lift Base 3630 to Lift Rack 3618]
FIG. 195 is a perspective view of the elevation drive mechanism 3601, FIG. 196 is a perspective view showing the rear elevation base 3630 from the inside, and FIG. 197 is a side view of the rear elevation base 3630. For example, as shown in FIG. 181, the transparent plate-shaped rear lift base 3630 is configured such that the left and right ends are attached to the lift racks 3618 arranged on the left and right. As shown in FIG. 195, engaging pins 3624 and 3624 as cylindrical engaging projections that project inward are fixed to the lower end and the upper end of the lifting rack 3618.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 196 to 197, the rear elevation base 3630 has a support recess 3030a at the center on the inner surface, supporting the rear side of each shaft of the rotational power transmission mechanism 3686 and covering the blade rotation drive motor 3648. Back plates 3060b are formed on both side edges of the support recess 3030a, and side plates 3060c and 3060c are formed on both sides of the left and right back plates 3060b and 3060b. Each is integrally formed.

  Rectangular fitting holes 3626 and 3626 are formed in the side plates 3060c and 3060c of the rear lift base 3630 at positions corresponding to the engagement pins 3624 and 3624 of the lift rack 3618 (FIGS. 196 to 197). ). The size (width and height) of the fitting hole 3626 is slightly larger than the diameter of the engagement pin 3624.

  In the rear elevation base 3630, the engagement pins 3624, 3624, 3624, 3624 of the elevation racks 3618 arranged on the left and right are loosely engaged with the left and right fitting holes 3626, 3626, 3626, 3626 of the rear elevation base 3630. The left and right ends of the rear elevating base 3630 are attached by being engaged (by the engagement pin 3624 being inserted with a play).

  Here, the mounting structure described above is a horizontally long dimension (a center symbol set as shown in FIG. 153) by the separate lifting drive mechanisms 3601 and 3601 at the time of lifting or lowering the lifting racks 3618 and 3618 at left and right. When moving up and down the rear lift base 3630 (approximately the same as the width dimension of 600), even if the drive start timing of the left and right lift racks 3618 may shift, the mounting structure with play (play) absorbs the timing shift. As a result, the rear lifting base 3630 can be prevented from being jammed.

  In the present embodiment, the elevating rack 3618 is provided with the engagement pin 3624, and the rear elevating base 3630 is provided with the fitting hole 3626. However, the reverse, that is, the elevating rack 3618 is provided with the fitting hole 3626, The engaging pin 3624 may be provided on the rear lift base 3630 to provide the above-mentioned effect of preventing the prying.

  Thus, in the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 of this example, the pinion gear 3616 engaged with the rack gear 3618 a of the elevating rack 3618 which is made slidable in the vertical direction by the elevating rail 3620 The lower elevating drive motor 3606 for rotatably driving the pinion gear 3616 is attached near the lower end of the elevating rail 3620, and the rotational drive of the lower elevating drive motor 3606 is a plurality of transmission gears 3610, It is transmitted to the upper pinion gear 3616 by 3612 and the like.

  Thereby, the lower elevation drive motor 3606 can be disposed at a position where it is difficult to stand out, and the elevation rack 3618 is moved over substantially the entire length of the elevation rail 3620 to make the wing decoration members 3640, 3642, 3664, 3666 as possible. Can be raised high. In addition, since the lifting rack 3618, which moves up and down by the rotation of the pinion gear 3616 of the lifting drive mechanism 3601, has a vertically elongated structure, the width on both sides of the back of the game board is narrow, and the unit base It can be stored and arranged, and by attaching a center character 2400 or a decoration board (for example, the right logo decoration portion 2424, FIG. 187) to the front game board surface, it can be easily hidden from being seen by the player.

  Also, the lower movable decorative unit 3600 includes a drive gear, a first transmission gear 3610, a second transmission gear 3612, and a third transmission in a box-shaped unit base 3602 whose rear opening is closed by a unit base cover 3604. Since the gear, the pinion gear 3616, the lifting rack 3618, and the lifting rail 3620 are accommodated, dust and the like can be prevented from adhering to the driving parts, and the driving parts can move well. It has become. Furthermore, the lower movable decorative unit 3600 includes a drive gear 3650, a left driven gear 3652, a right driven gear 3542, a rear right wing drive gear 3656, a rear left wing drive gear 3658, etc., which are disposed and supported on the rear side of the front lift base 3632. Since the rear side is covered by the rear elevation base 3630, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from adhering to these drive parts as well, and the respective drive parts can move favorably.

  The front lift base 3632 of the lower movable decorative unit 3600 has a plurality of radially extending plural rays centered on the center of the circular lower central decorative member 3634 formed three-dimensionally on the front surface as shown in FIG. 169 etc. While making a plurality of radiation appear depending on how it hits the light beam, it is difficult for the player to see most of the rotary power transmission mechanism 3686 disposed behind the front lift base 3632 It can be done.

  In addition, the lower central decorative member 3634 of the lower movable decorative unit 3600 has a star-shaped opening 3634a above the circular opening 3634a as shown, and arcs on the left and right sides of the star-shaped opening 3634a. Of the opening 3634a. The lower central decorative member 3634 is provided with a plurality of relief-like star-shaped decorations on its front surface, and is provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on its surface. The lens member 3636 fitted and inserted from the rear side into the opening 3634a of the lower central decorative portion 3634 is not shown in detail but has a smooth curved surface and a plurality of fine lenses on the back surface. While being formed, the light from the lower central decoration substrate 3638 disposed on the rear side of the lens member 3636 can be widely diffused to allow the entire opening 3634 a to emit light uniformly, and the lens member 3636 is formed. The rear side is almost invisible from the rear.

  Furthermore, the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 of the lower movable decoration unit 3600 are formed into an extended wing shape and have a plurality of protrusions extending from the arm side to the wing end. doing. Further, although the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 are not shown in detail, a plating layer having a metallic luster along the outer periphery is provided in a frame shape, and the metallic luster along the surface A plating layer having the above is provided in a fine arabic pattern to decorate the transparent front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642. The front right wing decoration substrate 3644 and the front left wing decoration substrate 3646 disposed on the rear side of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 have a plurality of LEDs 3644 a, which have white surfaces and are mounted on the surface. 3646a are arranged along a plurality of ridges formed on the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 as shown in FIG. The front right wing decorative substrate 3644 and the front left wing decorative substrate 3646 are opaque, and from the player side, the front right wing decorative substrate 3644 and the front left wing decorative substrate 3646 (the front right wing decorative member 3640 in the front lifting base 3632 And the rear side of the arranged position of the front left wing decoration member 3642 can not be seen.

  Also, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 of the lower movable decoration unit 3600 are formed into an extended wing like the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642. And a plurality of ridges extending from the arm side to the wing tip. The rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are not shown in detail but are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster along the outer periphery in a frame shape, and the metallic luster along the surface A plating layer having the above is provided in a fine arabic pattern to decorate the transparent rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666.

  The rear right wing decoration substrate 3668 and the rear left wing decoration substrate 3670 disposed behind the right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are transparent substrates so that they can hardly be seen from the player side. It has become. Further, the rear right wing base 3660 and the rear left wing base 3662 for supporting the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 and the rear right wing decoration substrate 3668 and the rear left wing decoration substrate 3670 have a transparent plate shape. The rear side (the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400) can be viewed through the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 from the side.

  FIG. 198 is a perspective view showing the rear right wing decorative substrate 3668 of the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 from the rear surface. FIG. 199 is a perspective view showing the rear left wing decorative substrate 3670 of the lower movable decorative body unit 3600 from the back surface. The rear right wing decorative substrate 3668 and the rear left wing decorative substrate 3670 of the left and right wing-like rear movable decorative members are arranged at the middle portion of the arc-shaped edges 3668 b and 3670 b with connectors 3690 for connection to the LEDs 3668 a and 3670 a It is done. Since it is set as the said arrangement configuration, it can prevent that the back movable decorative body in rotation is pulling in the bundle | flux of a lead wire at the time of the rotation of raising and lowering of a rear movable decoration on either side.

  After this, the right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are pivotally supported on the rear side of the lower center decoration member 3634 so as to rotate around the rotation axes of the rear right wing drive gear 3656 and the rear left wing drive gear 3658, respectively. From the state located on the rear side of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 by the wing rotation drive motor 3648 to simultaneously rotate to a state in which the free ends move upward so as to approach each other. It has become.

  When the lower movable decorative unit 3600 of this example is attached to the game board 4 as shown in FIG. 148 etc., the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 are on the lower side of the center character 2400. The player can visually recognize from the player side through the transparent game panel 600, and decorates the upper left and right sides of the attacker unit 2100 below the center character 2400 by the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642. It is possible to Also, the left and right unit bases 3602 of the lower movable decorative unit 3600 are not visible from the player side.

  Next, the movement of the lower movable decorative unit 3600 will be described. In the lower movable decorative body unit 3600, as shown in FIG. 183A, in the normal state, the lifting bases 3630 and 3632 supported by the lifting rails 3620 in the left and right unit bases 3602 are located at the lowered position. There is. Also, in the normal state, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are located at a hidden position directly behind the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 and can not be seen from the player side It has become. Furthermore, in the lowered position, the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 of the lower movable decoration unit 3600 are positioned lower than the center character 2400 (see FIG. 148, etc.). ).

  When the lower elevating drive motors 3606 disposed at the left and right are simultaneously rotated in different directions from this state of the lowered position, the left and right pinion gears 3616 rotate and are guided to the elevating rails 3620 by the rack gear 3618 a meshed with the pinion gears 3616 The lifting rack 3618 ascends, and the lifting bases 3630 and 3632 ascend in parallel with each other as the left and right lifting racks 3618 rise.

  At this time, as described above, the left and right fitting holes 3626, 3626, 3626, 3626 of the rear lift base 3630 are loosely engaged (the engagement pin 3624 is engaged with play) Can prevent the rear lift base 3630 from being pricked, and can smoothly rise.

  When the left and right lifting racks 3618 reach the upper end of the lifting rails 3620, the lower lifting drive motor 3606 is stopped, and the lifting bases 3630 and 3632 are stopped at the rising position (see FIG. 183B). In this raised position, the lower central decorative member 3634, the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 attached to the front side of the elevation base 3630 3632 are in the frame of the center part 2400 (the liquid crystal display 1400 It is positioned in front of the display screen above the stage 2410) (see FIG. 191), and can be clearly viewed from the player side.

  In order to lower the elevation bases 3630 and 3632 in the elevation position, the elevation bases 3630 and 3632 can be lowered by respectively rotating the lower elevation motors 3606 on the left and right in the direction opposite to that at the time of elevation. The lower elevation drive motor 3606 is driven to lower the elevation rack 3618 until the detection piece of the elevation rack 3618 is detected by the lower elevation detection sensor 3622. Then, when the detection piece of the lifting rack 3618 is detected by the lower lifting detection sensor 3622, the rotational drive of the lower lifting drive motor 3606 can be stopped, and the lifting bases 3630 and 3632 can be returned to the lowered position. There is. Also at this time, as described above, the loosely engaged engagement with the left and right fitting holes 3626, 3626, 3626, 3626 of the rear lift base 3630 (with the engagement pin 3624 having a play to engage Can prevent the rear lift base 3630 from being pricked, and can be lowered smoothly.

  On the other hand, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are mounted on the front lifting base 3632 from the state of the concealed position located behind the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 The motor 3648 is rotated in a predetermined direction, and the rear right wing drive gear 3656 and the rear left wing drive gear 3658, which are pivotally supported near the center in the lateral direction, simultaneously rotate in different directions, and the right wing drive gear 3656 and the rear left wing drive gear The free end sides of the right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 supported by the 3658 so as to be integrally rotatable are pivoted so as to rise and approach both left and right end sides of the lower movable decorative unit 3600. When the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 rotate about 90 degrees, the rotation of the wing rotation drive motor 3648 stops, and substantially the entire rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 It will be in the state of the appearance position which appeared on the upper side of the right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 (refer FIG.183 (C)).

  At this time, when the left and right rear movable decorations rotate in the rising direction, the left and right rear movable decorations are raised because the torque of the drive motor is assisted by the biasing force of the torsion coil springs 3688 and 3688. It is possible to smoothly move the decorative body upward.

  When the rear right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 appear, as shown in FIG. 192, most of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is the rear right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 and the front. It is covered by the right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 so that the lower movable decoration unit 3600 is visible from the player side. In the above example, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are located at the appearance position when the raising and lowering bases 3630 and 3632 are at the raising position, but the raising and lowering bases 3630 and 3632 are at the lowering position. At this time, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 may be positioned at the appearance position.

  In order to position the right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 in the concealed position after being positioned at the emergence position, the wing rotation drive motor 3648 is turned in the opposite direction to that at the time of emergence to obtain the rear right wing. The tips of the decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 can be turned so as to move away from each other and move downward, and the detection piece 3656a of the right rear wing drive gear 3656 is detected by the wing rotation detection sensor 3672 The blade rotation drive motor 3648 is driven to rotate. Then, when the detection piece 3656a of the right rear wing drive gear 3656 is detected by the wing rotation detection sensor 3672 and the wing rotation drive motor 3648 is stopped, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are located at the concealed position It is supposed to be in a state of

  At this time, when the left and right rear movable decorative members rotate in the downward direction, the moment by the weight of the left and right rear movable decorative members acts on the torsion coil springs 3688 and 3688 to compress the torsion coil springs 3688 and 3688 in the winding direction. Receive the bias when rising.

  Thus, in the arrangement space (in the back rear unit 3000b) limited in the depth direction between the gaming panel 600 and the liquid crystal display device 1400 disposed behind the gaming panel 600, a small drive motor (with small torque) The left and right movable decorative bodies provided with the plurality of LEDs 3668a and 3670a can be simultaneously rotated by the wing rotation drive motor 3648), and the upward and downward rotational movements of the left and right rear movable decorative bodies can be smoothly performed.

  Thus, according to the lower movable decorative unit 3600 of this embodiment, when the elevating base 3630 3632 is in the lowered position, the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 are transparent from the lower side of the center character 2400. Since it is possible to visually recognize through the game panel 600, the inside of the game area 605 can be decorated, and the lower central decorative board 3634, the front right wing decorative board 3644 and the front left wing decorative board 3646 have respective LEDs 3634a, By emitting light from 3644a and 3646, the lower side of the center character 2400 can be lighted and decorated, so that it is possible to surprise and entertain the player with the decoration that is not available in conventional pachinko machines, and the interest for gaming decreases. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower movable ornament unit 3600 can emit light and decorate the lower side of the center character 2400, the inside of the game area 605 can be made to stand out, and it is possible to differentiate more greatly from other pachinko machines. It becomes possible, and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which can attract the player's attention strongly.

  The front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 that decorated the lower side of the center character 2400 appear and move to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 by moving the elevating base 3630 and 3632 to the rising position. It is possible to surprise the player, to attract the player's attention, and to change the decoration in the game area 605, and something is good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is not so and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game by enhancing the player's sense of expectation.

  Furthermore, since the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 can be turned to the emergence position with the elevating base 3630, 3632 moved to the raising position, the four wing-like decorations The appearance of the members 3640, 3642, 3664, and 3666 makes it possible to greatly surprise the player and to expect an effect of further enhancing the player's interest.

  In addition, since the front face of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is covered by the four wing-shaped decorative members 3640, 3642, 3664, and 3666, the player can be entertained.

  Furthermore, with the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 rotated to the emerging position, the lower central decoration member 3634, the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing By making each LED 3638a, 3644a, 3646a, 3668a, 3670a of each decoration substrate 3638, 3644, 3646, 3668, 3670 arranged on the rear side of the decoration member 3666 emit light, substantially the entire lower movable decoration unit 3600 While being able to make a light emission decoration, it is possible to make the player be dazzled and entertained by the dazzling light, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game.

[2-10. Various substrates on the back of the back box]
Next, various types of substrates attached to the rear surface of the back box main body 3100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 168 and 185. FIG. 185 is a plan cross-sectional view of the back box main body along with the peripheral substrate box. In the gaming board of the present embodiment, a plurality of substrates connected to a main control substrate 4100 described later are attached to the rear surface of the back box main body 3100. Specifically, on the back surface of the back box main body 3100, a first lamp drive substrate 3801 mounted horizontally below the opening 621c in the back box main body 3100, and the back surface of the first lamp drive substrate 3801 are covered A box-shaped lamp drive board box 3804 fixed to 3100, and a second lamp drive board 3802 attached to the front of the rear wall in the lamp drive board box 3804 to face the first lamp drive board 3801 There is.

  The first lamp driving substrate 3801 and the second lamp driving substrate 3802 are connected to the respective decoration substrates provided on the game board 4, a drive motor for moving the movable decoration, a detection sensor, etc. It is connected to the peripheral control board 4140 mounted on the rear side, and drives each decoration board and drive motor based on the output signal from the peripheral control board 4140 according to the control command from the main control board 4100. . The first lamp driving substrate 3801 and the second lamp driving substrate 3802 are supported by the lamp driving substrate box 3804 so as to face each other as shown in the figure, and the space on the rear side of the back box main body 3100 is effectively utilized. It can be done.

  In addition, it is attached to the left side (right side in rear view) of the lamp drive board box 3804 on the rear side of the back box main body 3100, and the first start port sensor 3080, the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, and the general winning port A panel relay board 3806 relaying the connection between the sensor 3081, gate sensor 2304, start port solenoid 2121, attacker solenoid 2124, magnetism detection sensor 3044, peripheral control board 4140, and main control board 4100 is provided.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the back box main body 3100, a right relay terminal board 3808 and a left relay terminal board 3810 attached to the left and right sides of the rear surface of the rear wall 621b are provided. The right relay terminal board 3808 and the left relay terminal board 3810 are the respective decoration substrates of the attacker unit 2100, the side decoration member 2200, the back front unit 3000b, the upper movable decoration unit 3200, the side movable decoration 3400, and the lower movable decoration 3600. 2114, 2129, 2206, 2430, 2432, 2434, 3024, 3025, 3036, 3043, 2333, 3238, 3247, 3249, 3418, 3638, 3664, 3646, 3668, 3670, drive motors 3212, 3216, Relaying the connection of the first lamp driving substrate 3801 and the second lamp driving substrate 3802 with 3224, 3404, 3606, 3648 and the detection sensors 3220, 3221, 3250, 3408, 3622, 3672, etc. A.

[2-11. Luminescent decoration on the game board]
Next, the light emission decoration on the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a front view showing the position of the main decorative substrate on the game board. As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes the plurality of decorative substrates capable of emitting light to the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and various light emission decorations are performed based on the control signal from the peripheral control substrate 4140. (Light emission effect) can be performed.

  In the game board 4 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 186, the lower left arc decoration substrate 2206 of the side decoration member 2200, the right arc decoration substrate 2430 of the center character 2400, and the upper arc decoration substrate 3024 of the back front upper decoration member 3020. The left upper arc decoration substrate 3035 of the back front left part decoration member 3030 is disposed along the inner periphery of the game area 605, the right arc decoration substrate 2430 is the right end of the game area 605, the left bottom arc decoration substrate 2206 and the upper left The arc decoration substrate 3035 can emit light and decorate the left end of the game area 605, and the upper arc decoration substrate 3024 can emit light and decorate the upper end of the game area 605 in an arc shape.

  In addition, in the game board 4, the attacker side decoration substrate 2114 of the attacker unit 2100 and the lower arc decoration substrate 3043 of the back front lower decoration member 3040 are at the center lower end in the horizontal direction in the game area 605, the first start of the attack unit 2100 The opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the special winning opening 2103 are disposed so as to surround the bottom of the game area 605 with the light emitting decoration of the lower end of the game area 605. It is supposed to be. By emitting light from these decorative substrates 2114, 2206, 2430, 3025, 3035, and 3043, the substantially circular game area 605 can be decorated to emit light in a ring shape, and a light emission decoration that strongly attracts the interest of the player can be obtained. It can be done.

  The LEDs 2114a, 2206a, 2430a, 3025a, 3035a, and 3043a mounted on the decorative substrates 2114, 2206, 2430, 3025, and 3043 are, as shown, an opaque translucent grass pattern disposed on the front side. The decorative portions 2205, 2420, 3021, 3031, and 3041 in the shape of a letter are arranged so as to partially cover in a front view, and it is possible to prevent the player from giving intense glare to the point-like shape. The light emission can surprise the player and attract the player's attention strongly.

  In addition, since a part of each of the LEDs 2114a, 2206a, 2430a, 3025a, 3035a, and 3043a is placed on the arabesque-shaped decorative portions 2205, 2420, 3021, 3031, and 3041, when the player's eyes move The degree of contact between the LED 2114a, 2206a, 2430a, 3025a, 3035a, 3043a and the decorative part 2205, 2420, 3021, 3031, 3041 changes, and the light from the LED 2114a, 2206a, 2430a, 3025a, 3035a, 3043a blinks. It looks like, and it is possible to make the player feel entertained.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment is provided with circular right circular decorative portions 2421 and left circular decorative portions 3032 at the left and right ends near the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in front view. The right circular decorative portion 2421 and the left circular decoration are made to emit light by emitting the LEDs 2432 a and 3036 a of the right circular decorative substrate 2432 and the left circular decoration substrate 3036 disposed on the rear side of the right circular decorative portion 2421 and the left circular decorative portion 3032 Each of the sections 3032 can be lighted and decorated independently. By making the right circular decoration part 2421 and the left circular decoration part 3032 emit light and decorate, it is possible to add an accent to the light emission decoration of the entire game board 4, and it is possible to perform a light emission effect that is hard to get tired There is. In addition, the light emission decoration along the inner periphery of the game area 605 is performed by allowing the right circular decoration portion 2421 and the left circular decoration portion 3032 to emit light along with the arc-shaped decoration portions 2205, 2420, 3021, 3031, 3041 described above. It is designed to be able to get closer to a ring.

  In the game board 4 of this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the right logo movable ornament 3230 and the left logo movable ornament 3235 of the upper movable ornament unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 are centered above the liquid crystal display device 1400. A right logo decoration substrate 3233 and a left logo decoration substrate which are arranged at positions visible to the player side through the frame of the character 2400 and arranged on the rear side of the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 By making each LED 3233a, 3238a of 3238 emit light, the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 can be lit and decorated, and the logo becomes bright, thereby giving the player the concept of the pachinko machine 1 Make it easy to recognize the game, and think that chances have come for the game It can, interest in the game to increase the player's expectation is made to be able to be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, in the game board 4 of the present embodiment, the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 of the lower movable decoration unit 3600 are viewed through the transparent game panel 600 under the center character 2400. The front right wing decoration substrate 3644 and the front left wing decoration substrate 3646 disposed on the rear side of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 enable the attacker unit 2100 below the center feature 2400. The light emitting decoration can be made to the area at the upper left and right sides.

  Also, the lower movable decorative unit 3600 raises the front and rear bases 3630 and 3632 to raise the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 within the frame of the center part 2400 on the front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The wing-like decorative members 3640 and 3642 can be lighted and decorated in the center character 2400 by emitting light from the LEDs 3644a and 3646a of the front right wing decorative substrate 3644 and the front left wing decorative substrate 3646 in this state. It has become possible to make it a luminous decoration that can attract the attention of people.

  With the lifting base 3630 and 3632 raised, the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are further rotated to appear above the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 and the rear right wing The four right-handed decoration substrates 3668 disposed on the rear side of the decoration member 3664 and the rear-left wing decoration member 3666 and the four LEDs 3668a and 3670a of the rear left-wing decoration substrate 3670 The wing-shaped decorative members 3640, 3642, 3664, and 3666 will be light-emitting decorated, and the brightly shining wings can attract the player's attention very strongly, and it is strongly hoped that something good will happen. To be able to fully expect the effect of being able to Going on.

  In the game board 4 of this embodiment, the decorative members 3020, 3030, and 3040 of the back unit 3000a in the back unit 3000 are disposed on the rear side of the transparent game panel 600, and the decoration members 3020, 3030, When the decorative substrates 3024, 3035, 3036, and 3043 that cause 3040 to emit light are emitted, the light is reflected by the game panel 600 to the surface side of the decorative members 3020, 3030, and 3040, and the decorative members 3020 and 3030 are emitted. , 3040's surface can be made to shine.

  Further, in the game board 4 of the present embodiment, since the front face of the game board 4 is closed by the transparent glass plate 452 of the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5, the decoration board provided in the game board 4 The light can be reflected by the glass plate 452 to illuminate the surface of each decorative member provided on the game board 4, and the surface of each decorative member can be made to glow.

  Furthermore, as described above, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of star-shaped decorative portions 2422, 3023, 3334, 3070, 3219, 3241b and various decorative portions provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface. It is equipped with light, such as light from each decoration board, light from other pachinko machines, or light from the illumination in the game hall where pachinko machine 1 is installed, so it shines sparklingly. The board 4 can give the player an impression at first glance different from conventional pachinko machines, and can be a pachinko machine 1 that makes it desirable to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play a game It is supposed to be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 152, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is capable of emitting light toward the inside of the game window to the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5 that closes the front of the game board 4. The light from the LED 453a of the glass unit 450 is reflected on the surface of each decorative member in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the inside of the game area 605 can be made to glow.

[2-12. Movable decoration on the game board]
Next, the movable decoration (movable effect) in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 187 is a front view showing the movement of the upper movable decoration unit on the game board, FIG. 188 is a front view showing the movement of the upper movable decoration unit following FIG. 187, and FIG. It is a front view which shows the motion of a decoration unit. FIG. 190 is a front view showing the movement of the side movable decoration in the game board. Further, FIG. 191 is a front view showing the movement of the lower movable decorative body in the game board, and FIG. 192 is a front view showing the movement of the lower movable decorative body following FIG. As described above, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of movable decorative bodies movable on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and various movable based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 4140. It is possible to perform decoration (movable effect).

  In the gaming board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 186 etc., the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 are in contact with each other in the frame of the center character 2400 on the upper side of the liquid crystal display 1400. In the horizontal direction. In this state, when the left and right logo drive motors 3212 supported by the unit base 3211 of the main unit 3210 in the upper movable decorative unit 3200 are rotationally driven in different directions, the logo drive gear 3213 together with the rotation shaft of the logo drive motor 3212 , And the sliders 3214 slide away from each other by the rack gear 3214 a engaged with the logo drive gear 3213.

  As a result, the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235 supported by the left and right sliders 3214 respectively move in directions away from each other, and the star-shaped rotation of the star unit 3240 disposed on the rear side As shown in FIG. 187, the decorative body 3245 is visible from the player side. In this manner, the star-shaped decorative decorative body 3245 appears on the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 1400 by moving the left and right logo movable decorative bodies 3230 and 3235 away from each other, thereby providing a chance for the player. It can be expected to arrive, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

  In the game board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 187, the left and right logo movable decorative bodies 3230 and 3235 in the upper movable decorative body unit 3200 move in directions away from each other, and the star shape in the rear star unit 3240 When the rotary decoration body 3245 appears and the pair of star unit raising and lowering drive motors 3216 supported by the unit base 3211 are rotationally driven in different directions, the raising and lowering fixed to the rotation shaft 3216 a of the star unit raising and lowering drive motor 3216 The arms 3217 rotate in different directions (the lift arm 3217 on the right side in a front view and the left lift arm 3217 rotate clockwise). The free end of the lift arm 3217 The star unit 3240 supported via the lift pins 3218 attached to the It has become.

  The lift pins 3218 attached to the lift arm 3217 are, in the initial state (in the raised position), slightly inward from the top dead center, and once driven by the star unit lifting drive motor 3216. After rotating to the top dead center, it moves on the circumference of a predetermined diameter centering on the rotation axis of the star unit elevating drive motor 3216 toward the bottom dead center. Therefore, the star unit 3240 supported by the pair of lift arms 3217 is slightly lifted and then lowered by the rotational drive of the star unit lift drive motor 3216. Then, when the lift pins 3218 attached to the lift arm 3217 reach the bottom dead center, the rotational drive of the star unit lift drive motor 3216 is stopped, and the star unit 3240 is positioned at the lowered position.

  In the state where the star unit 3240 is located at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. 188, the star unit 3240 is located at the upper front of the liquid crystal display 1400 and two on the left and right of the central star-shaped decorative ornament 3245 The star-shaped decorations 3248 arranged one by one appear under the right logo movable decoration 3230 and the left logo movable decoration 3235. Thus, the appearance of the entire star unit 3240 at the top of the liquid crystal display device 1400 changes the decoration state in the game area 605, thereby attracting the interest of the player and making it difficult to get bored. As a result, the player can be made to foresee the arrival of a chance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  In this gaming board 4, as shown in FIG. 188, when the star rotation drive motor 3242 supported on the rear side of the star unit 3240 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction with the star unit 3240 positioned at the lowered position, A large star-shaped rotary decoration 3245 disposed at the center of the front of the unit 3240 is adapted to rotate in a predetermined direction (see FIG. 189). Since the rotation of the star-shaped rotating decorative body 3245 can attract the player's interest strongly, it is possible to make the player think that something good may have happened and to increase the expectation for the game. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 189, while rotating the star-shaped rotary decorative body 3245 of the star unit 3240, make each LED 3247a of the star decorative substrate 3247 disposed on the rear side of the star-shaped rotary decorative body 3245 emit light. The star-shaped rotating decoration 3245 can be lighted and decorated. In addition, since the light from each LED 3247a can be momentarily blocked by the rotating star frame 3245c by rotating the star-shaped rotary decorative body 3245, the light from the LED 3247a can be blinked, and the glittering light emission decoration It can be done. Furthermore, according to the rotational position of the star-shaped decorative ornament 3245, the LED 3247a arranged near each vertex of the pentagon-like shape on the star decorative substrate 3247 does not pass through the star-shaped decorative decorative 3245 and directly to the player side. Since it is possible to emit light, it is possible to increase the glittering feeling of the light emitting decoration by making the player side instantly dazzling. Therefore, by making the star unit 3240 emit light and decoration, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and along with the rotation of the star-shaped rotating decoration 3245, the player becomes entertained and the interest for the game decreases. It can be suppressed.

  As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment is provided with the side movable decoration unit 3400 on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400 behind the center character 2400 and the back front unit 3000a, respectively, In this case, the free end side of the decorative body 3414 is hung down, and as shown in FIG. 186 etc., the side movable decorative body unit 3400 can not be seen from the player side. In this state, when the side drive motor 3404 in the side movable decoration unit 3400 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction, the decoration main body 3414 formed in a spotlight shape is rotated, as shown in FIG. 190, the large opening 3414a. The front end side which has it has appeared in the frame of the center character 2400 in front view, and it is possible to entertain the player. In addition, the decoration main body 3414 of the side movable decoration unit 3400 arranged on the left and right is configured to be movable independently on the left and right.

  The side movable decoration unit 3400 can emit light and decorate the decoration body 3414 by causing the LEDs 3418a and 3420a of the side tip decoration substrate 3418 and the side base end decoration substrate 3420 to emit light. Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device with the decorative body 3414 of the side movable decorative unit 3400 appearing on the front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and at least the LED 3418a of the side tip decorative substrate 3418 lit. It is possible to display an effect image as if the light of the spotlight is being emitted from the large opening 3414 a of the decoration body 3414 on the display screen 1400, and the decoration body 3414 of the side movable decoration unit 3400. Can be enjoyed along with the movement of.

  Further, in the gaming board 4 of this example, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 186, the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 of the lower movable decoration unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 It is located at the lower position lower than the inside of the frame, and can be viewed through the transparent game panel 600, and is a decorative member for decorating the lower side of the center character 2400. The lower movable decorative unit 3600 is driven to rotate the lower lifting drive motor 3606 disposed on the left and right in different directions with the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 in the lowered position. After supporting the right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 and the like, the lifting base 3630 and the front lifting base 3632 are lifted.

  Then, the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 rise from the lower side of the center character 2400 to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 within the frame of the center character 2400, as shown in FIG. When the upper ends of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 rise to near the approximate center in the vertical direction in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the rotational drive of the pair of lower lifting drive motors 3606 is stopped, and the rear lifting base 3630 and The front lift base 3632 stops at the lift position. When the rear lift base 3630 and the front lift base 3632 are in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 191, the lower central decoration member 3634, the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 are positioned within the frame of the center part 2400. At the same time, the front surface of the front lifting base 3632 viewed from the lower side of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 is also positioned within the frame of the center product 2400.

  As the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 rise and appear in the frame of the center character 2400, the decoration mode in the game area 605 is largely changed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is supposed to be. In this state, the lower central decorative substrate 3638, the front right wing decorative substrate 3644 and the front left wing decorative substrate 3646 disposed on the rear side of the lower central decorative member 3634, the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 By emitting light from 3644a and 3646a, it is possible to lightly decorate the wings that greatly spread to the left and right within the frame of the center character 2400, and the player's interest is strongly attracted and the interest of the player is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the back decoration board 3106 is disposed on the rear side of the lower movable decoration unit 3600 at a position lower than the frame of the center character 2400, and together with the rear elevating base 3630 and the front elevating base 3632, the front right wing When the decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 ascend, the back decoration board 3106 having a predetermined decoration on the surface can be seen from the player side through the transparent game panel 600 under the center character 2400. , It is possible to prevent the decorativeness of the entire game board 4 is reduced.

  In the game board 4 of this example, the wing rotation drive supported by the front lift base 3632 with the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 positioned at the rising position together with the rear lift base 3630 and the front lift base 3632 When motor 3648 is driven to rotate, a pair of rear right wing decorative members 3664 and rear left wing disposed between front elevating base 3632 and rear elevating base 3630 on the rear side of front right wing decorative member 3640 and front left wing decorative member 3642 The decoration member 3666 is pivoted so that the left and right tip sides rise around the center side of the game area 605 so that the upper right of the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 can be seen from the player side A decorative member 3664 and a rear left wing decorative member 3666 appear.

  Then, when the left and right ends of the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 turn up to near the upper end of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the rotational drive of the wing rotation drive motor 3648 is stopped. Then, with the right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 appearing above the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642 as shown in FIG. 192, the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member Most of the front face of the liquid crystal display 1400 is covered with the 3642 and the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666, and the appearance of four wing-like decoration members will greatly surprise the player. It is possible to further enhance the player's interest.

  Also, with the rear right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 appearing above the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642, the lower central decorative member 3634, the front right wing decorative member 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642, a lower central decorative substrate 3638 disposed on the rear side of the rear right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666, a front right wing decorative substrate 3644 and a front left wing decorative substrate 3646, a rear right wing decorative substrate 3668 and a rear left wing decorative substrate 3670 By making each of the LEDs 3638a, 3644a, 3646a, 3668a, 3670a emit light, the inside of the frame of the center character 2400, that is, the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be dazzlingly dazzlingly decorated, and the player is It can be dazzled and entertained, as well as for games It has become possible to heighten the sense of expectation.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the game board 4 of this example, the movable movable units of the upper movable decorative unit 3200, the side movable decorative unit 3400, and the lower movable decorative unit 3600 are combined appropriately It can be made movable, and it is possible to make it harder to get bored by showing the player more various moving effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

  In the present embodiment, the front right wing decorative substrate 3644 and the front left wing decorative substrate 3646 are opaque, but may be transparent as in the rear right wing decorative substrate 3668 and the rear left wing decorative substrate 3670, Thus, when the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666 are positioned behind the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642, the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 and the rear right wing decoration member Reflection of light is repeated like an infinite mirror between 3664 and rear left wing decoration member 3666, and it can be seen infinitely in line in the depth direction, and a deep decoration can be realized, and each front right wing decoration LEDs 3638a, 3644a, 36 for the substrate 3644 and the front left wing decorative substrate 3646, the rear right wing decorative substrate 3668 and the rear left wing decorative substrate 3670 When the 6a, 3668a, 3670a are made to emit light, the light is repeatedly reflected between the front right wing decoration member 3640 and the front left wing decoration member 3642 and the rear right wing decoration member 3664 and the rear left wing decoration member 3666. It is possible to make it appear that more LEDs emit light than the number of LEDs 3638a, 3644a, 3646a, 3668a, 3670a, and can make the light emission decoration sparkling.

  Furthermore, the surface of the back surface decoration plate 3106 may be a decoration having a mirror surface such as a mirror, whereby the member on the front side reflected by the back surface decoration plate 3106 is photographed when viewed from the player side. It is possible to give an illusion of a deep depth, and a deep decoration can strongly attract the player's attention.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a block diagram of a main substrate and a peripheral substrate. As illustrated, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 is configured to include a main control substrate 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control substrate 1186 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like. In addition, the group of peripheral boards 4010 is a peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and effects on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. And a liquid crystal control substrate 4150 for controlling display of an image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 193, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes the main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor and the main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device). And a RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, as well as a watchdog timer that monitors the operation (system) and prevents fraud It also has built-in functions to

  The main control MPU 4100a is a first starting opening sensor 3080 for detecting gaming balls received to the first starting opening 2101, a second starting opening sensor 2127 for detecting gaming balls received to the second starting opening 2102, and a part thereof A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3081 is input through the main control I / O port 4100b, or a magnetic detection sensor attached to the gate sensor 2304, the general winning opening sensor 3081, the count sensor 2128, and the back unit 3000. A detection signal from 3044 is input via the panel relay board 3086 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100 b. The main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to the start port solenoid 2121 and the attacker solenoid 2124 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay board 3086 based on these detection signals, or the main control I / O. First special symbol display 641, second special symbol display 642, first special symbol memory display 643, second special symbol memory display 644, ordinary via port 4100 b, panel relay substrate 3086, function display substrate 640 a A drive signal is output to the symbol indicator 645, the normal symbol memory indicator 646, the game state indicator 647, and the round indicator 648.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control substrate 1186 via the main drawer relay substrate 1107 described above, and a pachinko machine from the payout control substrate 1186 Various commands and the like regarding the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107 or the like. Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The substrates of the main control substrate 4100 and the peripheral control substrate 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, as described in detail later, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 1136, the detailed description of which will be described later. The power supply substrate 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by this capacitor. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624 a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 1136, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. This blackout notice signal is also input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 etc via the not-shown harness.

[3-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 193, the payout control board 1186 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming balls includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control of the launch motor 695 described above, and An error LED display 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball pull switch 4132 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 193, the payout control unit 4110 for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 1186 includes a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110 c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110 c”) that monitors whether the MPU 4110 a is operating normally, and a payout motor drive circuit 4110 d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above; It is configured with. The payout control MPU 4110a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and further incorporates a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 4100 and various commands on payout, as described in detail later, and operates the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to the signal (detection signal) being input, the detection signal from full switch 916 is input, and the detection signals from out-of-ball switch 778, count switch 812 and rotation angle switch 855 are relay terminals within a prize ball unit It may be input through the plate 830.

  Further, when the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100, the payout control MPU 4110a outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands relating to payout. When the 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110 d is used to discharge (ball out) the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 described above based on the operation signal (detection signal). When a drive signal is output to the payout motor 815 or a rental ball request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal board 1150b, payout is performed based on the rental ball request signal. A drive signal is output from motor drive circuit 4110 d to dispensing motor 815 or When the detection signal from the switch 916 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 815 stops driving signal to the payout motor 815 from payout motor drive circuit 4110d based on the detection signal.

  Furthermore, when the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 4100, or the detection signal from the counting switch 812 is input. Based on the detection signal, the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 193, the launch control unit 4120 for performing launch control of the launch motor 695 in the payout control board 1186 is an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, and a transmission circuit that outputs clock signals at fixed time intervals. 4120b, a firing control circuit 4120c outputting a reference pulse for determining the rotational speed of the firing motor 695 based on the clock signal, and outputting a drive signal to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c And a launch motor drive circuit 4120 d. The firing control circuit 4120 c controls the rotation speed of the firing motor 695 so that about 99.95 gaming balls per minute are shot toward the playing area 605 based on the clock signal from the sending circuit 4120 b. . In other words, the movement of the above-described hitting rod 687 is controlled.

  As described above, the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are built in the handle device 460 (operation handle portion 461) described above, and when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 is touched, the touch sensor When the single-shot button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. These detection signals are input to the input circuit 4120a through the above-described handle relay terminal board 194, the detailed description of which will be described later. Also, when the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a through the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

  Various voltages are supplied from the power supply substrate 1136 to the payout control substrate 1186 in the same manner as the main control substrate 4100. The power supply substrate 1136 includes a capacitor for supplying power to the payout control substrate 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various types of payout information related to payout in the built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 193, the peripheral control board 4140 that performs effect control on the peripheral board 4010 performs high-quality sound performance by a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and A sound source IC 4140 c and a sound ROM 4140 d storing sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC 4140 c refers are configured.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates various input / output ports such as parallel input / output port, serial input / output port, watchdog timer (WDT), etc. When various commands are received from main control board 4100, based on these various commands. The lamp frame of the lamp drive board 4160 having the first lamp drive board 3801 and the second lamp drive board 3802 on the door frame side lighting blinking command for outputting the lighting signal or the blinking signal to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 5 The game board side lighting flickering command for outputting a lighting signal or blinking signal to the LED of each light emitting decoration board 3606 provided on the game board 4 is outputted to the lamp driving board 4160 or the door frame 5 is provided. Left rotation light motor 245, right rotation light motor 265, and central rotation light motor 2 of top lamp illumination unit 200 A door frame side motor drive command for outputting a rotational drive signal to 5 is output to the motor drive board 3013, or a logo drive motor 3212, a star unit elevating drive motor 3216, a star rotational drive motor 3242 and a side Control signal indicating sound information to be output to the lamp drive board 4160 or to extract the sound ROM 4140 d from the game board side motor drive command for outputting a rotational drive signal to the drive motor 3404, lower elevating drive motor 3606, and wing rotation drive motor 3648 (Sound command) is output to the sound source IC 4140 c, and a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is output to the liquid crystal control board 4150.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 4150 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in this embodiment, 19.2 km (k) as a bit rate (size of data which can be transmitted per unit time). BPPS (bits per second, hereinafter, described as "bps") is set. On the other hand, different from initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, door frame side motor driving command, game board side motor driving command, display command output from peripheral control MPU 4140a to lamp driving board 4160 This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 4160 is configured to have a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blinking command and the decoration boards 126, 190, 206, and 224 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , 225, 296, etc., and each decoration board 2114, 2129, 2206, 2430, 2432, 2434 provided on the game board 4 with a lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blinking command. , 3024, 3025, 3035, 3036, 3043, 2333, 2333, 3247, 3249, 3418, 3420, 3664, 3646, 3668, 3670, LED 453a of the glass decoration substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5 Output to In addition, the lamp drive board 4160 is based on the received door frame side motor drive command, and the left drive motor 245 and the right drive motor 265 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , And a logo drive motor 3212 provided on the game board 4 with a rotational drive signal based on the game board side motor drive command output to the central rotary light motor 285, a star unit elevating drive motor 3216, a star rotational drive motor It outputs to the side drive motor 3404, the lower lift drive motor 3606, and the blade rotation drive motor 3648.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a right logo movable ornament 3230, a left logo movable ornament 3235, a star unit 3240, a star-shaped rotary ornament 3245 in the upper movable ornament unit 3200 of the game board 4, a side movable ornament unit Of the decoration main body 3414 in 3400 and the elevation bases 3630 and 3632 (front right wing movable decoration member 3640 and front left wing movable decoration member 3644) in the lower movable decoration unit 3600, rear right wing movable decoration member 3664 and rear left wing movable decoration member 3666 Detection signals from detection sensors 3220, 3221, 3250, 3408, 3622 and 3672 for detecting the movable position are respectively inputted through the lamp drive substrate 4160, and based on these detection signals, the right logo movable decoration is Body 3230, left logo movable decoration 3235 The original position of star unit 3240, star-shaped rotary decoration 3245, decoration main body 3414 of side movable decoration unit 3400, lifting base 3630, 3632, rear right wing movable decoration member 3664 and rear left wing movable decoration member 3666 is grasped .

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a detects the rotational position of the rotary lamps 244, 264 and 284 of the door frame 5, and the detection signals from the left rotational position detection sensor 250, the right rotational position detection sensor 270 and the central rotational position detection sensor 290 The rotational positions of the rotary lights 224, 264, 284 are grasped based on the detection signals of the sub drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013, respectively. Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control substrate 4150, or the operation button unit 370 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Operation detection signals from the main button sensor 376 and the sub button sensor 378 that detect the operation of the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are input via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 4160. The main button 371 is provided with a vibrating body 371c, and a driving signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 4160. There is.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 via the lamp drive board 4160 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. Control so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow.

  Peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) not shown, and peripheral control MPU 4140a performs peripheral control using the internal watchdog timer (internal WDT) in combination with external WDT. It is diagnosing whether the system of MPU4140a has runaway.

[3-4. Liquid Crystal Control Substrate]
Next, a liquid crystal control substrate 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the peripheral substrate 4010 is a liquid crystal control MPU that stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. ROM 4150b, VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for display control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 described above, character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and stored in the character ROM 4150d And various character data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port and the like, and receives the display command described above from the peripheral control board 4140, although the detailed description will be described later. Then, the VDP 4150 c is controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a operates normally, as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the display command, nonresident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the display command, and the like, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screen drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constructed by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in character ROM 4150 d to a non-resident area described later of character RAM 4150 e in time series. . In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e is defined in advance as screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, it extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the first screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the head screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data to be described later from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400. The VDP 4150 c adopts a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is a method to output.

  The character ROM 4150 d stores a great deal of sprite data, and its capacity is large. As the capacity of the character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1400, data for drawing the respective persons is called "sprite". Accordingly, in the case where a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. The sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the positions arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap with each other.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays the pixels in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right of the liquid crystal display device 1400 It is driven by a main scan that sets a state, and a sub-scan that repeatedly performs the main scan in the direction intersecting with the one direction. When the liquid crystal display device 1400 receives drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control substrate 4150, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315 selects the liquid crystal display device 1400 as main scanning based on the drawing data for one line. Output to the pixels of one line sequentially from the left to the right. Then, when the output for one line is completed, it shifts to the line immediately below as the sub scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the liquid crystal display as the main scan based on the drawing data for the next line. The signals are sequentially output to pixels for one line sequentially from left to right of the device 1400.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1400 incorporates a backlight (cold cathode tube) which is lit by the inverter substrate 1411.

[4. Game content]
The game contents in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, the functional configuration relating to the game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 194 and the like. In addition, about the functional structure which concerns on payout of a game ball, it abbreviate | omits. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game control, effect control, and the like are embodied by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. In this main control board 4100, when the detection signal of the game ball is input from the gate sensor 2304, the ordinary random number generation means 4200 for generating a predetermined ordinary random number which is a lottery result for the ordinary symbol, and the generated ordinary random number In the main control board 4100, an ordinary symbol hold storage unit 4202 temporarily stored according to the conditions of the above and an ordinary symbol variation pattern corresponding to an ordinary random number executed after being stored by the ordinary symbol hold storage unit 4202 A normal symbol display control means for changing and displaying a normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in 4206 and the normal disturbance displayed on the normal symbol display 645 by the normal symbol display control means 4206 The start opening opening / closing control means 4208 which drives the start opening solenoid 2121 to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105 when the (normal lottery result) is "normal hit", and the normal stored in the normal symbol storage means 4202 An ordinary symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of figure random numbers as the storage number on the ordinary symbol storage display 646 is provided.

  The normal symbol holding storage unit 4202 described above has a predetermined number (for example, four) of the normal random numbers generated in response to the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate sensor 2304 while the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display control unit 4206 ) And hold the execution of the stored random number until the variable display of the symbol is possible.

  Further, on the main control board 4100, a first predetermined lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first starting opening sensor 3080 by the start winning to the first starting opening 2101. A first special random number generation means 4212 for generating a special random number, and a first special symbol hold storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generation means 4212 according to a predetermined condition; A predetermined special symbol variation display pattern previously stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100, corresponding to the first special random number corresponding to the first special random number stored on the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and executed. The first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 selected from the table and the first special symbol variation selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 The first special symbol display control means 4218 for variably displaying the first special symbol of the first special symbol display 641 based on the turn, and the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 The first special symbol storage number display control means 4220 displayed on the first special symbol storage display 643 as the storage number is provided.

  Furthermore, on the main control board 4100, a second predetermined special lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start opening sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second start opening 2102 A second special random number generation means 4222 for generating a special random number, and a second special symbol hold storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generation means 4222 according to a predetermined condition; A predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 with a second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number stored on the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 and executed The second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4226 selected from the table and the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4226 The second special symbol display control means 4228 for variably displaying the second special symbol of the second special symbol display 642 on the basis of the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 A second special symbol storage number display control means 4230 is displayed on the second special symbol storage display 644 as the storage number.

  The first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are new special symbols such as the first and second special symbols being changed display by the first and second special symbol display control means 4218, 4228 The first special random number or the second special random number triggered by the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3080 or the second starting opening sensor 2127 can not be changed and displayed at a predetermined number (for example, four each) As well as storing up to, the execution of the first special random number and the second special random number stored until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible.

  In addition, on the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the second special random number held by the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224, the start winning prize to the starting openings 2101, 2102 The system is provided with a priority reserve digesting means 4231 for giving priority to the second special random number (timing) rather than timing, and the second reserve random number according to the priority reserve digesting means 4231 relates to the second starting port 2102 Holding of the lottery results is prioritized and executed (digested).

  In addition, the first special random number (the first special lottery result) and the second special random number (the second special random number (the second special random number) stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 in the main control board 4100 An advantageous gaming state generation means 4232 for generating an advantageous gaming state which is advantageous for the player based on the special lottery result), and an opening / closing member 2106 for closing the special winning opening 2103 based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generation means 4232 A special winning opening / closing control means 4234 is provided to drive and control the attachment solenoid 2124 so as to open and close in a predetermined pattern.

  In addition, according to the first special random number and the second special random number (the first special symbol fluctuation pattern and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern) in which the advantageous gaming state is generated by the advantageous gaming state generation means 4232 in the main control board 4100, It further comprises fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table. The variation pattern table changing means 4236 changes, for example, to a variation pattern table (for example, a high probability variation pattern table) which is selected with a high probability that the variation pattern generated by the advantageous gaming state is higher than the normal variation pattern table Change to a variation pattern table (for example, a time reduction variation pattern table) with a time variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being shorter than a normal variation pattern table (so-called definite variation) (so-called, short time) The probability of occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is higher than normal, and it is changed to a variation pattern table (for example, a probability variation time variation pattern table) having a short variation time of a special symbol (so-called probability variation / time shortening).

  Furthermore, in the main control board 4100, a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol storage according to the normal random number, the first special random number, and the second special random number, Command generation means 4238 for generating commands for predetermined control such as rendering commands based on the second special symbol storage etc., and command transmission means 4240 for transmitting commands generated by the command generation means 4238 to peripheral control board 4140 And have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the operation handle portion 461 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game ball is started to be launched into the upper part of the game area 605 disposed on the front of the game panel 600. The game balls driven into the upper part in the game area 605 flow down in the upper left side or the right side of the game area 605 according to the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operating handle portion 461 so that it can be hit harder as it is rotated clockwise. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted at a suitable position in the front of the game panel 600 with a predetermined gauge array, and the game ball is in contact with the obstacle nails to allow the game balls to flow down. While the speed is suppressed, various motions are given to the game ball and the motions can be enjoyed.

  When the game balls driven into the upper part of the center character 2400 flow down the left side from the approximate center in the left-right direction and reach the upper shelf 2404 of the center character 2400, the upper shelf 2404 moves to the left region of the center character 2400. It is When the gaming ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2400 enters and passes through the gate 2302 of the gate member 2300 disposed on the left side of the center character 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2304, the detection signal is based on the detection signal. In the main control board 4100, the normal random number generation means 4200 generates an ordinary random number as an ordinary lottery result. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 in the function display unit 1400 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 645 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), Normal symbols extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) elapse and based on normal random numbers (normal lottery results) are stop displayed (normal symbol indicator 645 emits either red or green) . The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table in the normal symbol variation pattern selection unit 4204.

  Specifically, in the case where the drawn normal random number is a "normal hit" random number, stop display is made with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (the normal symbol display 645 emits green light), and the drawn normal random number is a "normal loss" random number In this case, the stop display is made with a normal symbol that suggests a loss (normal symbol display 645 emits light in red). Then, when the normal symbol indicating a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 closing the second start opening 2102 is expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), The game ball can be awarded to the second starting opening 2102.

  The variation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second starting opening 2102 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later, for example, a special random number (special When “short time per minute (including normal short time per, high probability short per time, etc.)” is extracted as a lottery result), the fluctuation time or the spread time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 can be easily changed by selecting it after replacing it with a different table.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an area where game balls can flow down is provided on the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center character 2400 but the center to the right along the outer periphery of the game area 605 An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided, and when the game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center part 2400 without having an opportunity to enter the gate member 2300 or the warp entrance 2405. As the chances are reduced, the movement of the game ball can not be enjoyed so much. Therefore, the player appropriately adjusts the amount of rotation of the operation handle 461 so that the game ball flows down the area on the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center character 2400, and the game ball is played in the dark cloud It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest by suppressing the game operation such as hitting hard and enjoying the game by the operation of the operation handle section 461 inherent to the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in this example, when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2304 while the normal symbol is being changed and displayed in the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol during the change is stopped and the ordinary generated and extracted earlier Until the result of the random number is decided, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary pattern variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2304 is temporarily stored by the ordinary symbol storage means 4202 and its display The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 646. The ordinary symbol storage indicator 646 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit indicates the number of the storage. In this example, up to four can be stored and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds four, the normal random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2304 is discarded.

  In addition, the game ball which has been driven into the game area 605 and flowed down the left side of the center character 2400 is moved toward the center side of the game area 605 below the center character 2400 by the shelf portion 2102 of the side decoration member 2100. It has become. Then, when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 2104 arranged below the center role 2400 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3081, the main control board 4100 pays out control board 1186 based on the detection signal. To the predetermined payout command, the payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the winning ball unit 800 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311. It is supposed to be paid out.

  If the gaming ball driven into the gaming area 605 does not win in any of the general winning opening 2104, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the game area 605 is It is provided at the center lower end in the left-right direction, and is discharged from the out port 606 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. In addition, even if the game ball is won in any of the general winning opening 2104, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103, the winning game balls are returned to the inside of the game area 605 It is discharged to the rear lower side of the game board 4 without.

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2400 enters the warp entrance 2405 opened on the left side surface of the center character 2400, the game ball is supplied to the first stage 2411 on the rear side of the stage 2410 of the center character 2400. It is supposed to be Then, the gaming balls supplied onto the first stage 2411 roll on the first stage 2411 in the left-right direction, released forward, and supplied onto the second stage 2412. In the second stage 2412 as well, the gaming balls roll in the left-right direction and are released into the gaming area 605 above the attacker unit 2100. When the gaming ball is released from the center of the second stage 2412 in the stage 2410 into the gaming area 605, it can be received to the first starting opening 2101 with high probability. Then, when the gaming ball is received by the first starting opening 2101 and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3080, a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming balls from the winning ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 etc. Are to be dispensed to the storage tray 311.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the big winning opening 2103 are arranged in the vertical direction, the gaming ball released from the stage 2410 is It is likely to be accepted by the first starting opening 2101 etc. with a high probability, and when the second starting opening 2102 or the large winning opening 2103 is acceptable, the possibility of being accepted when the gaming ball is released from the stage 2410 is high. Therefore, not only the first starting opening 2101 but also the second starting opening 2102 and the big winning opening 2103 can be made to have a sense of expectation regarding the reception of the game ball and to enhance the interest.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate 2302 of the gate member 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2304 and a "normal hit" is drawn as a normal lottery result, as described above, the pair that closes the second starting opening 2102 When the movable piece 2105 is expanded for a predetermined time to be able to win, and the game ball is received by the second starting opening 2102 and detected by the second starting opening sensor 2127 when the winning is possible, the main control board A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the storage tray 311 from the prize ball unit 800 via 4100 and the like.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, when the game ball is won in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3080 and the second start port sensor 2127, the first start The first special random number generation means 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number in the mouth 2101, and the second start random number 2102 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number by the second special random number generation means 4222. It will be. Then, after the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 1400 is started based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result. In the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests "big hit", the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern A special advantage gaming state (for example, a big hit game) is generated, and in the meanwhile, more game balls can be obtained by winning game balls to the large winning opening 2103. It should be noted that, when one gaming ball wins the big winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of gaming balls are paid out to the storage tray 311 from the winning ball unit 800.

  The first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display also in the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102 as well as the variation display of the normal symbol by passing the gaming ball to the gate member 2300. When the special symbol in 642 is being displayed in a variable display or the special symbol such as in a big hit game as a special advantageous gaming state can not be displayed in a variable manner, the game ball wins in the starting openings 2101 and 2102, and the first starting opening sensor 3080 , And until it becomes possible to change display of the special symbol when it is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2127, the second extracted based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3080 and the second starting opening sensor 2127 The first special random number and the second special random number are stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224, and the display thereof is held. It has become the number of the stored special random numbers, to be displayed in the first special symbol memory indicator 643 or the second special symbol memory indicator 644.

  The first special symbol memory indicator 643 and the second special symbol memory indicator 644 consist of two LEDs, respectively, and indicate the number of memories by the combination of the light emitting states of each of the lighted, lit, and blinking LEDs. In this example, up to four of each are stored and displayed. When the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random numbers are discarded. In addition, the second special random number stored (held) by the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority hold and digest unit 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored by the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 Are to be carried out (digested). That is, withholding of the lottery result relating to the second starting port 2102 is executed (digested) in preference to holding of the lottery result relating to the first starting port 2101.

  In the main control board 4100, the first special random number or the second special random number special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting opening sensor 3080 and the second starting opening sensor 2127 is selected as the first special symbol variation pattern selection The special random number is "lost", "small hit" by collating with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol change pattern table) determined in advance by means 4216 or second special symbol change pattern selection means 4226. The "big hit" is determined, and the "big hit" is also determined as either "2R big hit" or "15R big hit". In addition, the random number determination table is also configured to determine "perhaps with a certain time variation", "perhaps with a certain variation", "per time variation", "a certain probability during a short time" and the like.

  Then, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the starting winning combination of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (special drawing result), "small hit" In this case, the main control board 4100 closes the open / close member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 as the open state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) by the advantageous game state generation means 4232 The opening and closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

  On the other hand, when the extracted first special random number and second special random number are "big hit", the main control board 4100 is opened after the open / close member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened by the advantageous gaming state generation means 4232. An open / close pattern (one for opening / closing member 2106 when time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy the condition of winning in large winning opening 2103 (1 The opening and closing pattern is called one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds), and if it is "2R big hit" it will be repeated 2 rounds, if it is "15R big hit" it will be repeated 15 rounds each An advantageous game state advantageous to the player is generated. In addition, after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, the variation pattern table changing unit 4236 exchanges the random number determination table with the high probability time short table etc. in accordance with the extracted special random number for "big hit".

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the starting winning combination of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (special lottery According to the result), in addition to the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 1400 being variably displayed, also in the liquid crystal display device 1400, according to the special random number (special lottery result) The effect image is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows), and then sequentially stopped When all symbol rows are finally displayed in a stopped state, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player. That is, according to the special lottery result by the starting winning combination, after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed, the effect image to be stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed. In addition, since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are larger in size than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 641 and 642, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. I will pay attention to the design.

  As one of the effect images on which a plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed, a combination of symbols stopped and displayed with one fluctuating symbol row displayed is displayed such that a specific condition (reach) is satisfied. As a special lottery result in which the "reach effect image" is displayed, there are "reach per reach" and "reach lost". In addition, there is also a "reach development effect image" which is displayed so as to be connected to the "reach effect image" and emphasizes and displays the remaining symbol rows variably displayed after reach display. In addition to the effect display related to the start winning, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can also display a "big hit game effect image" displayed during the "big hit" game.

  The variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 193). The variation display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled by the peripheral control substrate 4140 and the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 based on the command according to the lottery result transmitted from the main control substrate 4100 to the peripheral control substrate 4140. ing. In this manner, since the variation display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 to which the player pays particular attention is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, a certain one of the lottery results transmitted from the main control board 4100 For one command, a plurality of fluctuation patterns of symbols can be prepared in advance to increase the fluctuation patterns of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400. In addition, "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed in the "big hit" game and the like are also controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. As a result, the display pattern of the effect image to be displayed can be increased without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player and less likely to get bored. It has become.

  In the peripheral control board 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, the right logo movable ornament 3230 of the movable upper movable ornament unit 3200 provided on the back unit 3000 and the left according to the command concerning the lottery result. Logo movable decoration 3235, star unit 3240, star-shaped rotating decoration 3245, decoration main body 3414 of side movable decoration unit 3400, rear lifting base 3630 and front lifting base 3632 of lower movable decoration unit 3600 (front right wing The decorative members 3640 and the front left wing decorative member 3642), the rear right wing decorative member 3664 and the rear left wing decorative member 3666 etc. are appropriately operated, and the respective decoration substrates 2114, 2129, 2206, 2430, 2432, provided on the game board 4 etc. 2434, 3024, 3025, 3035, 3036, 3043, 3233 The LEDs mounted on 3238, 3247, 3249, 3418, 3420, 3638, 3664, 3646, 3668, 3670 are caused to emit light as appropriate, so that the player can be entertained by the movable effect or the light emission effect. ing.

  In the specification according to the embodiment of the present invention, the description in the specification is paragraph [0709] to paragraph [0757], and the drawings are FIGS. 148 to 150, 153, 167, 169, 170, and 181. ~ Figure 184, Figure 191 ~ 192, Figure 195 ~ 198.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, It applies to the pachislot machine, and the gaming machine formed by uniting a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

1 Pachinko Machine 2 Outer Frame 3 Body Frame 4 Game Board 5 Door Frame 101 Game Window 450 Glass Unit (Window Board Unit)
451 unit frame 452 glass plate (window plate)
453 Glass decorative substrate (light emitting means)
453a LED (light emitting unit)
600 game panel 601 front component 602 outer rail 603 inner rail 605 game area 606 out port 621 back box 621c opening 630 panel holder 640 function display unit 649 function display seal 1400 liquid crystal display device 2000 table unit 2100 attacker unit 2101 first starting opening 2102 second starting opening 2103 large winning opening 2104 general winning opening 2105 movable piece 2106 opening and closing member 2110 base plate 2113 base plate lens member (patterned portion, light transmitting portion)
2114 Attacker side decoration board (lighting means)
2114a LED (Point light part)
2200 side decoration member 2300 gate member 2202 main body member 2204 side lens member 2205 left lower circular arc decoration portion (patterned portion, light transmitting portion)
2206 Lower left arc decorative board (light emitting means)
2206a LED (Point Light)
2300 Gate member (decorative body)
2400 Center feature (decorative body)
2401 flange portion 2402 insertion wall portion 2403 front wall portion 2404 upper shelf portion 2407 back plate 2410 stage 2420 right arc decoration portion (patterned portion, light transmitting portion)
2422 Star decoration (pyramidal decoration)
2430 Right circular decorative board (lighting means)
2430a LED (Point light part)
3000 back unit 3000a back front unit 3000b back back unit 3020 back front upper decoration member (decoration body)
3021 Upper arc decoration part (pattern part, light transmission part)
3023 Star decoration (pyramidal decoration)
3024 Upper circular decorative board (light emitting means)
3024a LED (point light)
3030 back front left decoration member (decoration body)
3031 Upper left arc decoration part (pattern part, light transmission part)
3034 Star decoration (pyramidal decoration)
3035 Upper left arc decorative board (light emitting means)
3035a LED (point light part)
3040 back front lower decoration member (decoration body)
3041 Lower arc decoration part (pattern part, light transmission part)
3043 Lower arc decoration board (light emitting means)
3043a LED (Point light part)
3070 Star decoration (pyramidal decoration)
3106 back decoration plate 3100 back box main body 3200 upper movable decoration unit 3210 main unit 3211 unit base 3212 logo drive motor 3213 logo drive gear 3214 slider 3214a rack gear 3216 star unit lifting drive motor 3216a rotating shaft 3217 lifting arm 3218 lifting pin 3219 star Decorative part (pyramidal decorative part)
3230 right logo movable decoration 3235 left logo movable decoration 3240 star unit 3242 star rotation drive motor 3245 star rotation decorative body 3247 star decoration substrate 3248 star decoration 3400 side movable decoration unit 3414 decoration body 3414 a large 3418 side tip Decorative substrate 3600 Lower movable decorative unit 3601 Lifting mechanism 3602 Unit base 3604 Unit base cover 3606 Lower lifting drive motor 3610 First transmission gear 3612 Second transmission gear 3616 Pinion gear 3618 Lifting rack 3618a Rack gear 3620 Lifting rail 3622 Lower lifting sensor 3624 engaging pin 3626 fitting hole 3630 rear lifting base 3630a support recess 3630b back plate 3630c side plate 3632 front lifting base 3 34 bottom center decorative member 3634a opening 3636 lens member 3638 lower central decorative board 3638A LED
3640 front right wing decorative member 3642 front left wing decorative member 3644 front right wing decorative substrate 3644a LED
3646 Front left wing decoration board 3646a LED
3648 wing rotation drive motor 3650 drive gear 3652 left driven gear 3654 right driven gear 3656 rear right wing drive gear 3656a detection piece 3658 rear left wing drive gear 3660 rear right wing base 3662 rear left wing base 3664 rear right wing decoration member 3666 rear left wing decoration member 3668 rear Right wing decorative board 3668a LED
3668b edge 3670 rear left wing decoration board 3670a LED
3670b Edge 3672 Blade rotation detection sensor 3674 Motor cover 3676 Lower relay board cover 3678 Lower lower relay terminal board 3680 Lower lower left relay terminal board 3682 Lower upper right relay terminal board 3684 Lower left upper relay terminal board 3686 rotational power transmission mechanism 3688 torsion coil spring 3689 Retaining bar 3690 connector 3801 first lamp drive board 3802 second lamp drive board 4140 peripheral control board

Claims (1)

A game area where game media are shot by the operation of the player,
A game panel on which the game area is formed;
A decorative body disposed on the rear side of the game panel and including a light emitting unit;
Effect display means disposed behind the game panel and capable of visually recognizing a predetermined effect image displayed in a display area through the opening of the game panel;
Moving means for moving the decorative body according to the game situation;
A gaming machine comprising
The moving means may have a standby position overlapping with the game panel, and an operation position different from the standby position where specific effects by the decorative body can be performed while covering the display area with the decorative body rather than the standby position. Make the decoration movable
The decorative body is visible at the standby position overlapping the game panel,
The light emitting unit provided in the decorative body includes a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit,
The light emitting unit includes a light emitting unit that causes the first light emitting unit to emit light when the decoration body is in the standby position overlapping the game panel.
At the time of the specific effect execution which is made executable when the decorative body moves to the operation position different from the standby position, the light is not emitted at the standby position in addition to the first light emitting unit emitted at the standby position. When the specific effect is performed, the second light emitting unit emits light, which can be performed when the light emitting unit of the decorative body at the standby position moves to the operating position different from the light emitting unit and the standby position. It is comprised so that light emission control is possible so that the number of light emission of the said light emission part of a decoration may differ,
The decorative body is provided with a decorative portion which is not visible at the standby position and is visible at the time of the specific effect execution.
The light emission control of the light emitting unit provided in the decorative body and the control of the moving means for moving the decorative body are controlled by a common control means in common,
further,
The common control means is a display effect that can be executed by the effect display means in response to entering the winning opening provided in the game area, and a light emitting unit provided to the non-movable decorative object that is not moved by the moving means. A game machine characterized in that light emission can be controlled separately.

Images